]> git.ipfire.org Git - thirdparty/binutils-gdb.git/blame - ld/ld.texinfo
ld/testsuite/
[thirdparty/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
CommitLineData
252b5132
RH
1\input texinfo
2@setfilename ld.info
a2b64bed 3@c Copyright 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000,
8a308ae8
NC
4@c 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009
5@c Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 6@syncodeindex ky cp
dff70155 7@c man begin INCLUDE
252b5132
RH
8@include configdoc.texi
9@c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
c428fa83 10@include bfdver.texi
dff70155 11@c man end
252b5132
RH
12
13@c @smallbook
14
ff5dcc92
SC
15@macro gcctabopt{body}
16@code{\body\}
17@end macro
18
0285c67d
NC
19@c man begin NAME
20@ifset man
21@c Configure for the generation of man pages
22@set UsesEnvVars
23@set GENERIC
0285c67d 24@set ARM
49fa1e15 25@set H8300
0285c67d 26@set HPPA
0285c67d 27@set I960
0285c67d 28@set M68HC11
7fb9f789 29@set M68K
3c3bdf30 30@set MMIX
2469cfa2 31@set MSP430
2a60a7a8
AM
32@set POWERPC
33@set POWERPC64
49fa1e15
AM
34@set Renesas
35@set SPU
36@set TICOFF
2ca22b03 37@set WIN32
e0001a05 38@set XTENSA
0285c67d
NC
39@end ifset
40@c man end
41
252b5132
RH
42@ifinfo
43@format
44START-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
45* Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
46END-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
47@end format
48@end ifinfo
49
0e9517a9 50@copying
e49e529d
JM
51This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
52@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
53@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
54@end ifset
55version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 56
9fbcbd81 57Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000,
8a308ae8 582001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 59
cf055d54 60Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 61under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
cf055d54
NC
62or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
63with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
64Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 65section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0e9517a9 66@end copying
252b5132
RH
67@iftex
68@finalout
69@setchapternewpage odd
71ba23f6 70@settitle The GNU linker
252b5132 71@titlepage
71ba23f6 72@title The GNU linker
252b5132 73@sp 1
e49e529d
JM
74@subtitle @code{ld}
75@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
76@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
77@end ifset
252b5132
RH
78@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
79@author Steve Chamberlain
80@author Ian Lance Taylor
252b5132
RH
81@page
82
83@tex
84{\parskip=0pt
704c465c
NC
85\hfill Red Hat Inc\par
86\hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
71ba23f6 87\hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
252b5132
RH
88\hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
89}
90\global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
91@end tex
92
93@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
0285c67d 94@c man begin COPYRIGHT
9fbcbd81
NC
95Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998,
961999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free
97Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 98
0285c67d 99Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 100under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
0285c67d
NC
101or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
102with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
103Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 104section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0285c67d 105@c man end
252b5132 106
252b5132
RH
107@end titlepage
108@end iftex
4ecceb71 109@contents
252b5132
RH
110@c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
111
84ec0e6d 112@ifnottex
252b5132 113@node Top
71ba23f6 114@top LD
e49e529d
JM
115This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
116@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
117@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
118@end ifset
119version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 120
cf055d54 121This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
793c5807
NC
122Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
123in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
cf055d54 124
252b5132
RH
125@menu
126* Overview:: Overview
127* Invocation:: Invocation
128* Scripts:: Linker Scripts
129@ifset GENERIC
130* Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
131@end ifset
132@ifclear GENERIC
133@ifset H8300
134* H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
135@end ifset
c2dcd04e
NC
136@ifset Renesas
137* Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
252b5132
RH
138@end ifset
139@ifset I960
140* i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
141@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
142@ifset ARM
143* ARM:: ld and the ARM family
144@end ifset
145@ifset HPPA
146* HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
147@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
148@ifset M68HC11
149* M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
150@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
151@ifset M68K
152* M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
153@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
154@ifset POWERPC
155* PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
156@end ifset
157@ifset POWERPC64
158* PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
159@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
160@ifset SPU
161* SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
162@end ifset
74459f0e
TW
163@ifset TICOFF
164* TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
165@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
166@ifset WIN32
167* Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
168@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
169@ifset XTENSA
170* Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
171@end ifset
252b5132
RH
172@end ifclear
173@ifclear SingleFormat
174* BFD:: BFD
175@end ifclear
176@c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
177
178* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
179* MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
704c465c 180* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
370b66a1 181* LD Index:: LD Index
252b5132 182@end menu
84ec0e6d 183@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
184
185@node Overview
186@chapter Overview
187
188@cindex @sc{gnu} linker
189@cindex what is this?
0285c67d 190
0879a67a 191@ifset man
0285c67d 192@c man begin SYNOPSIS
ff5dcc92 193ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
0285c67d
NC
194@c man end
195
196@c man begin SEEALSO
197ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
198the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
199@file{ld}.
200@c man end
201@end ifset
202
203@c man begin DESCRIPTION
204
ff5dcc92 205@command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
252b5132 206their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
ff5dcc92 207compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
252b5132 208
ff5dcc92 209@command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
252b5132
RH
210a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
211to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
212
0285c67d
NC
213@ifset man
214@c For the man only
ece2d90e 215This man page does not describe the command language; see the
71ba23f6
NC
216@command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
217language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
0285c67d
NC
218@end ifset
219
252b5132 220@ifclear SingleFormat
ff5dcc92
SC
221This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
222to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
252b5132
RH
223write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
224@code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
225available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
226@end ifclear
227
228Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
229linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
230execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
ff5dcc92 231@command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
252b5132
RH
232(or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
233
0285c67d
NC
234@c man end
235
252b5132
RH
236@node Invocation
237@chapter Invocation
238
0285c67d
NC
239@c man begin DESCRIPTION
240
ff5dcc92 241The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
252b5132
RH
242and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
243you have many choices to control its behavior.
244
0285c67d
NC
245@c man end
246
252b5132
RH
247@ifset UsesEnvVars
248@menu
249* Options:: Command Line Options
250* Environment:: Environment Variables
251@end menu
252
253@node Options
254@section Command Line Options
255@end ifset
256
257@cindex command line
258@cindex options
0285c67d
NC
259
260@c man begin OPTIONS
261
252b5132
RH
262The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
263practice few of them are used in any particular context.
264@cindex standard Unix system
ff5dcc92 265For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
252b5132
RH
266object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
267link a file @code{hello.o}:
268
269@smallexample
270ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
271@end smallexample
272
ff5dcc92 273This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
252b5132
RH
274result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
275the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
276directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
277
ff5dcc92 278Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
511ab9e9
ILT
279point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
280as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
281which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
282files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
283different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
252b5132
RH
284occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
285option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
286noted in the descriptions below.
287
288@cindex object files
511ab9e9
ILT
289Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
290together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
291options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
292an option and its argument.
252b5132
RH
293
294Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
295specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
296and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
297are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
298message @samp{No input files}.
299
36f63dca 300If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
252b5132
RH
301assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
302augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
303linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
304permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
305or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
53d25da6
AM
306@code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
307script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
308extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
309to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
310the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
252b5132
RH
311
312For options whose names are a single letter,
313option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
314whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
315option that requires them.
316
317For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
e4897a32 318precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
36f63dca 319@samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
e4897a32 320this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
ba1be17e 321only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
e4897a32
NC
322@samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
323name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
324output.
325
326Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
327option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
328immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
329@samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
330Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
331accepted.
252b5132 332
36f63dca
NC
333Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
334(e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
fa19fce0
NC
335prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
336compiler driver) like this:
4e53152f
NC
337
338@smallexample
2509a395 339 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
4e53152f
NC
340@end smallexample
341
342This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
2509a395
SL
343silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
344may also arise when passing options that require values through a
345driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
346a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
347and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
348the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
349
350@smallexample
351 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
352@end smallexample
4e53152f
NC
353
354Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
355linker:
356
ff5dcc92 357@table @gcctabopt
38fc1cb1 358@include at-file.texi
dff70155 359
2509a395
SL
360@kindex -a @var{keyword}
361@item -a @var{keyword}
252b5132
RH
362This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
363argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
364@samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
365@samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
366to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
367
7ee314fa
AM
368@kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
369@item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
370Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
371@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
372specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
373will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
374finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
375it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
376This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
377interface.
378
252b5132
RH
379@ifset I960
380@cindex architectures
2509a395
SL
381@kindex -A @var{arch}
382@item -A @var{architecture}
252b5132
RH
383@kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
384@itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
ff5dcc92
SC
385In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
386Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
252b5132
RH
387@var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
388the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
ff5dcc92 389archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
252b5132
RH
390family}, for details.
391
ff5dcc92 392Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
252b5132
RH
393other architecture families.
394@end ifset
395
396@ifclear SingleFormat
397@cindex binary input format
398@kindex -b @var{format}
399@kindex --format=@var{format}
400@cindex input format
401@cindex input format
402@item -b @var{input-format}
403@itemx --format=@var{input-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
404@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
405file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 406@samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
ff5dcc92 407that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
252b5132 408configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
ff5dcc92 409to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
252b5132
RH
410default input format the most usual format on each machine.
411@var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
412supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
413formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
414@xref{BFD}.
415
416You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
417binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
418linking object files of different formats), by including
419@samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
a1ab1d2a 420particular format.
252b5132
RH
421
422The default format is taken from the environment variable
423@code{GNUTARGET}.
424@ifset UsesEnvVars
425@xref{Environment}.
426@end ifset
427You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
0285c67d
NC
428@code{TARGET};
429@ifclear man
430see @ref{Format Commands}.
431@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
432@end ifclear
433
434@kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
435@kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
436@cindex compatibility, MRI
437@item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
438@itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
ff5dcc92 439For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
252b5132 440files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
0285c67d
NC
441@ifclear man
442@ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
443@end ifclear
444@ifset man
445the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
446@end ifset
447Introduce MRI script files with
252b5132 448the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
ff5dcc92
SC
449scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
450If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
252b5132
RH
451specified by any @samp{-L} options.
452
453@cindex common allocation
454@kindex -d
455@kindex -dc
456@kindex -dp
a1ab1d2a 457@item -d
252b5132
RH
458@itemx -dc
459@itemx -dp
460These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
461compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
462even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
463script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
464@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
465
7ee314fa
AM
466@kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
467@kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
468@item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
469@itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
470Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
471@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
472specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
473will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
474option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
475The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
476
252b5132
RH
477@cindex entry point, from command line
478@kindex -e @var{entry}
479@kindex --entry=@var{entry}
a1ab1d2a 480@item -e @var{entry}
252b5132
RH
481@itemx --entry=@var{entry}
482Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
483program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
484named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
485and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
486base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
487@samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
488and other ways of specifying the entry point.
489
b58f81ae
DJ
490@kindex --exclude-libs
491@item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
492Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
e1c37eb5 493exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
b58f81ae
DJ
494@code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
495automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
496port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
497explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
498option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
499be treated as hidden.
500
e1c37eb5
DK
501@kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
502@item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
503Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
504should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
505into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
506may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
507used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
508the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
509match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
510command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
511of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
512regardless of this option.
513
252b5132
RH
514@cindex dynamic symbol table
515@kindex -E
516@kindex --export-dynamic
267e2722 517@kindex --no-export-dynamic
252b5132
RH
518@item -E
519@itemx --export-dynamic
267e2722
CD
520@itemx --no-export-dynamic
521When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
522option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
523all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
524set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
525
526If you do not use either of these options (or use the
527@option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
528dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
529referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
252b5132
RH
530
531If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
532back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
533dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
534linking the program itself.
535
55255dae 536You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
cb840a31 537be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
55255dae 538See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
cb840a31 539
8b747e1a
DK
540Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
541support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
542the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
543
36f63dca 544@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
545@cindex big-endian objects
546@cindex endianness
547@kindex -EB
548@item -EB
549Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
550
551@cindex little-endian objects
552@kindex -EL
553@item -EL
554Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
36f63dca 555@end ifclear
252b5132 556
2509a395
SL
557@kindex -f @var{name}
558@kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
559@item -f @var{name}
560@itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
561When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
562to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
563table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
564symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
565
566If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
567run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
568the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
569first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
570@var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
571in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
572Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
573implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
574machine specific performance.
575
576This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
577will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
578
2509a395
SL
579@kindex -F @var{name}
580@kindex --filter=@var{name}
252b5132 581@item -F @var{name}
2509a395 582@itemx --filter=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
583When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
584the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
585of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
586on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
587
588If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
589run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
590dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
591filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
592found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
593used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
594@var{name}.
595
ff5dcc92 596Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
252b5132 597toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
36f63dca
NC
598object files.
599@ifclear SingleFormat
600The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
ece2d90e 601@option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
252b5132 602@code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
36f63dca
NC
603environment variable.
604@end ifclear
605The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
606creating an ELF shared object.
252b5132 607
3dbf70a2 608@cindex finalization function
2509a395
SL
609@kindex -fini=@var{name}
610@item -fini=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
611When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
612executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
613address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
614the function to call.
615
252b5132
RH
616@kindex -g
617@item -g
618Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
619
2509a395
SL
620@kindex -G @var{value}
621@kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
252b5132 622@cindex object size
2509a395 623@item -G @var{value}
252b5132
RH
624@itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
625Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
626@var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
627MIPS ECOFF which supports putting large and small objects into different
628sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
629
630@cindex runtime library name
2509a395 631@kindex -h @var{name}
252b5132 632@kindex -soname=@var{name}
2509a395 633@item -h @var{name}
252b5132
RH
634@itemx -soname=@var{name}
635When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
636the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
637which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
638linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
639field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
640
641@kindex -i
642@cindex incremental link
643@item -i
644Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
645
3dbf70a2 646@cindex initialization function
2509a395
SL
647@kindex -init=@var{name}
648@item -init=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
649When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
650executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
651of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
652function to call.
653
252b5132 654@cindex archive files, from cmd line
2509a395 655@kindex -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf 656@kindex --library=@var{namespec}
2509a395 657@item -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf
RS
658@itemx --library=@var{namespec}
659Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
660list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
661If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
07d8eb55 662will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
bcb674cf 663will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
252b5132 664
ff5dcc92 665On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
bcb674cf
RS
666files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
667and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
668called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
669@file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
670indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
671to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
672@var{filename}.
252b5132
RH
673
674The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
675specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
676was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
677command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
678archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
679the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
680
ff5dcc92 681See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
252b5132
RH
682archives multiple times.
683
684You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
685
686@ifset GENERIC
687This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
ff5dcc92 688if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
252b5132
RH
689behaviour of the AIX linker.
690@end ifset
691
692@cindex search directory, from cmd line
2509a395 693@kindex -L @var{dir}
252b5132 694@kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
2509a395 695@item -L @var{searchdir}
252b5132 696@itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
ff5dcc92
SC
697Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
698for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
252b5132
RH
699option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
700in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
701on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
ff5dcc92 702@option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
7d24f02c
KH
703order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
704how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
705option is specified.
252b5132 706
9c8ebd6a
DJ
707If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=}, then the @code{=} will be replaced
708by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, a path specified when the linker is configured.
709
252b5132
RH
710@ifset UsesEnvVars
711The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
ff5dcc92 712@samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
252b5132
RH
713some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
714@end ifset
715
716The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
717@code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
718at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
719
720@cindex emulation
721@kindex -m @var{emulation}
2509a395 722@item -m @var{emulation}
252b5132
RH
723Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
724emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
725
726If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
727@code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
728
729Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
730configured.
731
732@cindex link map
733@kindex -M
734@kindex --print-map
735@item -M
736@itemx --print-map
737Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
738information about the link, including the following:
739
740@itemize @bullet
741@item
3b83e13a 742Where object files are mapped into memory.
252b5132
RH
743@item
744How common symbols are allocated.
745@item
746All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
747which caused the archive member to be brought in.
3b83e13a
NC
748@item
749The values assigned to symbols.
750
751Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
752involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
753have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
754linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
755of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
756the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
757linker script containing:
758
759@smallexample
760 foo = 1
761 foo = foo * 4
762 foo = foo + 8
763@end smallexample
764
765will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
766option is used:
767
768@smallexample
769 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
770 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
771 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
772@end smallexample
773
774See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
775scripts.
252b5132
RH
776@end itemize
777
778@kindex -n
779@cindex read-only text
780@cindex NMAGIC
781@kindex --nmagic
782@item -n
783@itemx --nmagic
90f5d9d9
JZ
784Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
785libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
786mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
252b5132
RH
787
788@kindex -N
789@kindex --omagic
790@cindex read/write from cmd line
791@cindex OMAGIC
a1ab1d2a 792@item -N
252b5132
RH
793@itemx --omagic
794Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
63fd3b82
NC
795not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
796libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
4d8907ac
DS
797mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
798is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
799specification published by Microsoft.
63fd3b82
NC
800
801@kindex --no-omagic
802@cindex OMAGIC
803@item --no-omagic
804This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
805sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
806be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
807shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
252b5132
RH
808
809@kindex -o @var{output}
810@kindex --output=@var{output}
811@cindex naming the output file
812@item -o @var{output}
813@itemx --output=@var{output}
ff5dcc92 814Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
252b5132
RH
815option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
816script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
817
818@kindex -O @var{level}
819@cindex generating optimized output
820@item -O @var{level}
ff5dcc92 821If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
252b5132 822the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
98c503ac
NC
823should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
824option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
825the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
826no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
827of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
252b5132 828
a712da20
NC
829@kindex -q
830@kindex --emit-relocs
831@cindex retain relocations in final executable
832@item -q
833@itemx --emit-relocs
ba1be17e 834Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
a712da20
NC
835Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
836order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
837in larger executables.
838
dbab7a7b
NC
839This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
840
4f471f39
RS
841@kindex --force-dynamic
842@cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
843@item --force-dynamic
844Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
845to VxWorks targets.
846
252b5132
RH
847@cindex partial link
848@cindex relocatable output
849@kindex -r
1049f94e 850@kindex --relocatable
252b5132 851@item -r
1049f94e 852@itemx --relocatable
252b5132 853Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 854turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
252b5132
RH
855linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
856magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
857@code{OMAGIC}.
ff5dcc92 858@c ; see @option{-N}.
252b5132
RH
859If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
860linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
861constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
862
62bf86b4
HPN
863When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
864partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
865relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
866example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
867with input files in other formats at all.
868
252b5132
RH
869This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
870
871@kindex -R @var{file}
872@kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
873@cindex symbol-only input
874@item -R @var{filename}
875@itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
876Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
877relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
878to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
879programs. You may use this option more than once.
880
ff5dcc92 881For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 882followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 883the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
884
885@kindex -s
886@kindex --strip-all
887@cindex strip all symbols
a1ab1d2a 888@item -s
252b5132
RH
889@itemx --strip-all
890Omit all symbol information from the output file.
891
892@kindex -S
893@kindex --strip-debug
894@cindex strip debugger symbols
a1ab1d2a 895@item -S
252b5132
RH
896@itemx --strip-debug
897Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
898
899@kindex -t
900@kindex --trace
901@cindex input files, displaying
a1ab1d2a 902@item -t
252b5132 903@itemx --trace
ff5dcc92 904Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
252b5132
RH
905
906@kindex -T @var{script}
907@kindex --script=@var{script}
908@cindex script files
909@item -T @var{scriptfile}
910@itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
911Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
ff5dcc92 912@command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
252b5132 913@var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
114283d8
NC
914output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
915the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
916specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
917options accumulate.
252b5132 918
14be8564
L
919@kindex -dT @var{script}
920@kindex --default-script=@var{script}
921@cindex script files
922@item -dT @var{scriptfile}
923@itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
924Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
925
926This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
927processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
928command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
929@option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
930behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
931command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
932the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
933@samp{gcc}).
934
252b5132
RH
935@kindex -u @var{symbol}
936@kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
937@cindex undefined symbol
938@item -u @var{symbol}
939@itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
940Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
941symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
942modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
943different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
944option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
945
946@kindex -Ur
947@cindex constructors
a1ab1d2a 948@item -Ur
252b5132
RH
949For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
950@samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 951turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
252b5132
RH
952@emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
953It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
954with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
955be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
956@samp{-r} for the others.
957
577a0623
AM
958@kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
959@item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
960Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
961@var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
962missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
963specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
964multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
965input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
966in a linker script.
a854a4a7 967
252b5132
RH
968@kindex -v
969@kindex -V
970@kindex --version
971@cindex version
972@item -v
973@itemx --version
974@itemx -V
ff5dcc92 975Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
252b5132
RH
976lists the supported emulations.
977
978@kindex -x
979@kindex --discard-all
980@cindex deleting local symbols
981@item -x
982@itemx --discard-all
983Delete all local symbols.
984
985@kindex -X
986@kindex --discard-locals
987@cindex local symbols, deleting
a1ab1d2a 988@item -X
252b5132 989@itemx --discard-locals
3c68c38f
BW
990Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
991system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
992or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
252b5132
RH
993
994@kindex -y @var{symbol}
995@kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
996@cindex symbol tracing
997@item -y @var{symbol}
998@itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
999Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1000option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1001to prepend an underscore.
1002
1003This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1004don't know where the reference is coming from.
1005
1006@kindex -Y @var{path}
1007@item -Y @var{path}
1008Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1009for Solaris compatibility.
1010
1011@kindex -z @var{keyword}
1012@item -z @var{keyword}
cd6d6c15
NC
1013The recognized keywords are:
1014@table @samp
1015
1016@item combreloc
1017Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
1018lookup caching possible.
1019
1020@item defs
560e09e9 1021Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
07f3b6ad 1022shared libraries are still allowed.
cd6d6c15 1023
6aa29e7b
JJ
1024@item execstack
1025Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1026
cd6d6c15
NC
1027@item initfirst
1028This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1029It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1030before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1031the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1032the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1033objects.
1034
1035@item interpose
1036Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1037but the primary executable.
1038
5fa222e4
AM
1039@item lazy
1040When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1041dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1042the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1043Lazy binding is the default.
1044
cd6d6c15
NC
1045@item loadfltr
1046Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1047runtime.
1048
1049@item muldefs
1050Allows multiple definitions.
1051
1052@item nocombreloc
1053Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1054
1055@item nocopyreloc
1056Disables production of copy relocs.
1057
1058@item nodefaultlib
1059Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1060ignore any default library search paths.
1061
1062@item nodelete
1063Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1064
1065@item nodlopen
1066Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1067
1068@item nodump
1069Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1070
6aa29e7b
JJ
1071@item noexecstack
1072Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1073
1074@item norelro
1075Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1076
cd6d6c15
NC
1077@item now
1078When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1079dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1080when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1081deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1082first called.
1083
1084@item origin
1085Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1086
6aa29e7b
JJ
1087@item relro
1088Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1089
24718e3b
L
1090@item max-page-size=@var{value}
1091Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1092
1093@item common-page-size=@var{value}
1094Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1095
cd6d6c15
NC
1096@end table
1097
ece2d90e 1098Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
252b5132
RH
1099
1100@kindex -(
1101@cindex groups of archives
1102@item -( @var{archives} -)
1103@itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1104The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1105either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1106
1107The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1108references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1109the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1110archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1111object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1112would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1113they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1114resolved.
1115
1116Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1117it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1118more archives.
1119
69da35b5
NC
1120@kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1121@kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1122@item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1123@itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1124Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
2ca22b03 1125recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
69da35b5
NC
1126and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1127the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1128behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1129so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1130restore the old behaviour.
2ca22b03 1131
4a43e768
AM
1132@kindex --as-needed
1133@kindex --no-as-needed
1134@item --as-needed
1135@itemx --no-as-needed
1136This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
ddbb8a31 1137on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
4a43e768
AM
1138the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1139on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
ddbb8a31
NC
1140needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
1141emitted for a library that satisfies an undefined symbol reference
1142from a regular object file or, if the library is not found in the
1143DT_NEEDED lists of other libraries linked up to that point, an
1144undefined symbol reference from another dynamic library.
4a43e768
AM
1145@option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
1146
e56f61be
L
1147@kindex --add-needed
1148@kindex --no-add-needed
1149@item --add-needed
1150@itemx --no-add-needed
ddbb8a31
NC
1151These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1152their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1153options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1154and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
e56f61be 1155
252b5132
RH
1156@kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1157@item -assert @var{keyword}
1158This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1159
1160@kindex -Bdynamic
1161@kindex -dy
1162@kindex -call_shared
1163@item -Bdynamic
1164@itemx -dy
1165@itemx -call_shared
1166Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1167for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1168default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1169for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1170multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
da8bce14 1171@option{-l} options which follow it.
252b5132 1172
a1ab1d2a
UD
1173@kindex -Bgroup
1174@item -Bgroup
1175Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1176section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1177object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
560e09e9
NC
1178@option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1179only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
a1ab1d2a 1180
252b5132
RH
1181@kindex -Bstatic
1182@kindex -dn
1183@kindex -non_shared
1184@kindex -static
a1ab1d2a 1185@item -Bstatic
252b5132
RH
1186@itemx -dn
1187@itemx -non_shared
1188@itemx -static
1189Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1190platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1191variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1192may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
560e09e9 1193library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
e9156f74
NC
1194option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1195option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1196shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1197references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
ece2d90e 1198libraries.
252b5132
RH
1199
1200@kindex -Bsymbolic
1201@item -Bsymbolic
1202When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1203definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1204for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1205within the shared library. This option is only meaningful on ELF
1206platforms which support shared libraries.
1207
40b36307
L
1208@kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1209@item -Bsymbolic-functions
1210When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
c0065db7 1211symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
40b36307
L
1212This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1213libraries.
1214
55255dae
L
1215@kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1216@item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1217Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1218typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1219global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1220within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1221to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1222in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1223which support shared libraries.
1224
1225The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1226scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1227
40b36307
L
1228@kindex --dynamic-list-data
1229@item --dynamic-list-data
1230Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1231
1232@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1233@item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1234Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1235is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1236
0b8a70d9
L
1237@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1238@item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1239Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1240
252b5132
RH
1241@kindex --check-sections
1242@kindex --no-check-sections
1243@item --check-sections
308b1ffd 1244@itemx --no-check-sections
252b5132 1245Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
7d816a17 1246been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
252b5132
RH
1247perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1248suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1249allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
560e09e9 1250restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
02b0b1aa
NS
1251Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1252force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1253option.
252b5132 1254
ddbb8a31
NC
1255@kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1256@kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1257@item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1258@itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1259This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
1260by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
1261command line. Normally the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
1262output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
1263input dynamic library. With @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}
1264specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
1265follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries ignored. The default
1266behaviour can be restored with @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1267
1268This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
1269libraries. With the default setting dynamic libraries mentioned on
1270the command line will be recursively searched, following their
1271DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1272required by the output binary. With
1273@option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries} specified however the searching
1274of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the dynamic
1275library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
1276symbols.
1277
252b5132
RH
1278@cindex cross reference table
1279@kindex --cref
1280@item --cref
1281Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1282generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1283Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1284
1285The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1286easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1287sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1288symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
1289definition. The remaining files contain references to the symbol.
1290
4818e05f
AM
1291@cindex common allocation
1292@kindex --no-define-common
1293@item --no-define-common
1294This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1295The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1296@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1297
1298The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1299the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1300of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1301forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1302Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1303from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1304This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1305and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1306duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1307paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1308
252b5132 1309@cindex symbols, from command line
2509a395
SL
1310@kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1311@item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
252b5132
RH
1312Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1313address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1314times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1315limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1316context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1317symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1318constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
1319using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments,,
1320Assignment: Symbol Definitions}). @emph{Note:} there should be no white
1321space between @var{symbol}, the equals sign (``@key{=}''), and
1322@var{expression}.
1323
1324@cindex demangling, from command line
28c309a2 1325@kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132 1326@kindex --no-demangle
28c309a2 1327@item --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132
RH
1328@itemx --no-demangle
1329These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1330and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1331present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1332underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
a1ab1d2a
UD
1333mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1334different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1335to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
28c309a2
NC
1336demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1337is set. These options may be used to override the default.
252b5132
RH
1338
1339@cindex dynamic linker, from command line
506eee22 1340@kindex -I@var{file}
2509a395
SL
1341@kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1342@item -I@var{file}
1343@itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
252b5132
RH
1344Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1345generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1346linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1347doing.
1348
7ce691ae 1349@kindex --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd 1350@kindex --no-fatal-warnings
7ce691ae 1351@item --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd
NC
1352@itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1353Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1354with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
7ce691ae 1355
252b5132
RH
1356@kindex --force-exe-suffix
1357@item --force-exe-suffix
1358Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1359
1360If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1361@code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1362the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1363option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1364Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1365it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1366
1367@kindex --gc-sections
1368@kindex --no-gc-sections
1369@cindex garbage collection
c17d87de
NC
1370@item --gc-sections
1371@itemx --no-gc-sections
252b5132 1372Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
ac69cbc6 1373targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
b3549761
NC
1374performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1375@samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line.
252b5132 1376
d5465ba2
AM
1377@samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1378examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1379symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1380command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1381referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1382libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1383referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1384the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1385relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1386
ac69cbc6 1387This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
fc073cb7 1388@samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
ac69cbc6
TG
1389specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1390a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1391
c17d87de
NC
1392@kindex --print-gc-sections
1393@kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1394@cindex garbage collection
1395@item --print-gc-sections
1396@itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1397List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1398printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1399collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1400default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1401be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1402line.
1403
252b5132
RH
1404@cindex help
1405@cindex usage
1406@kindex --help
1407@item --help
1408Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1409
ea20a7da
CC
1410@kindex --target-help
1411@item --target-help
1412Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1413
2509a395
SL
1414@kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1415@item -Map=@var{mapfile}
252b5132 1416Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
560e09e9 1417@option{-M} option, above.
252b5132
RH
1418
1419@cindex memory usage
1420@kindex --no-keep-memory
1421@item --no-keep-memory
ff5dcc92
SC
1422@command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1423symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
252b5132 1424instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
ff5dcc92 1425necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
252b5132
RH
1426while linking a large executable.
1427
1428@kindex --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1429@kindex -z defs
252b5132 1430@item --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1431@itemx -z defs
560e09e9
NC
1432Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1433is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1434The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1435behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
ece2d90e 1436libraries being linked in.
252b5132 1437
aa713662
L
1438@kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1439@kindex -z muldefs
1440@item --allow-multiple-definition
1441@itemx -z muldefs
1442Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1443report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1444first definition will be used.
1445
b79e8c78 1446@kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1447@kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
b79e8c78 1448@item --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1449@itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
903249d7 1450Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
560e09e9
NC
1451This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1452determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1453shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1454how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1455
903249d7
NC
1456The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1457referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1458an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1459a shared library.
1460
1461The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1462libraries specified at link time are that:
1463
1464@itemize @bullet
1465@item
1466A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1467that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1468resolvable at load time.
1469@item
1470There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1471symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1472
1473The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1474select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1475architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1476appropriate memset function.
1477@end itemize
b79e8c78 1478
31941635
L
1479@kindex --no-undefined-version
1480@item --no-undefined-version
1481Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1482it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1483will be issued instead.
1484
3e3b46e5
PB
1485@kindex --default-symver
1486@item --default-symver
1487Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
fc0e6df6
PB
1488exported symbols.
1489
1490@kindex --default-imported-symver
1491@item --default-imported-symver
1492Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1493imported symbols.
3e3b46e5 1494
252b5132
RH
1495@kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1496@item --no-warn-mismatch
ff5dcc92 1497Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
252b5132
RH
1498files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1499been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
ff5dcc92 1500This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
252b5132
RH
1501errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1502have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1503inappropriate.
1504
fe7929ce
AM
1505@kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1506@item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1507Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1508library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1509
252b5132
RH
1510@kindex --no-whole-archive
1511@item --no-whole-archive
ff5dcc92 1512Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
252b5132
RH
1513archive files.
1514
1515@cindex output file after errors
1516@kindex --noinhibit-exec
1517@item --noinhibit-exec
1518Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1519Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1520errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1521when it issues any error whatsoever.
1522
0a9c1c8e
CD
1523@kindex -nostdlib
1524@item -nostdlib
1525Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1526command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1527(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1528
252b5132 1529@ifclear SingleFormat
2509a395
SL
1530@kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1531@item --oformat=@var{output-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
1532@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1533file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 1534@samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
ff5dcc92
SC
1535object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1536object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
1537should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1538usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1539name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1540list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1541command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1542this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1543@end ifclear
1544
36af4a4e
JJ
1545@kindex -pie
1546@kindex --pic-executable
1547@item -pie
1548@itemx --pic-executable
1549@cindex position independent executables
1550Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1551ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1552libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
7e7d5768 1553address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
36af4a4e
JJ
1554normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1555defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1556
252b5132
RH
1557@kindex -qmagic
1558@item -qmagic
1559This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1560
1561@kindex -Qy
1562@item -Qy
1563This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1564
1565@kindex --relax
1566@cindex synthesizing linker
1567@cindex relaxing addressing modes
28d5f677 1568@cindex --no-relax
252b5132 1569@item --relax
28d5f677 1570@itemx --no-relax
a1ab1d2a 1571An option with machine dependent effects.
252b5132
RH
1572@ifset GENERIC
1573This option is only supported on a few targets.
1574@end ifset
1575@ifset H8300
ff5dcc92 1576@xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
252b5132
RH
1577@end ifset
1578@ifset I960
ff5dcc92 1579@xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
252b5132 1580@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
1581@ifset XTENSA
1582@xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1583@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
1584@ifset M68HC11
1585@xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1586@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
1587@ifset POWERPC
1588@xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1589@end ifset
252b5132 1590
28d5f677
NC
1591On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1592global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1593addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1594synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
1595instructions, and combinig constant values.
252b5132
RH
1596
1597On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1598debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1599@ifset GENERIC
28d5f677
NC
1600This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1601family of processors.
252b5132
RH
1602@end ifset
1603
1604@ifset GENERIC
1605On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1606but ignored.
1607@end ifset
1608
28d5f677
NC
1609On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1610@samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1611
252b5132
RH
1612@cindex retaining specified symbols
1613@cindex stripping all but some symbols
1614@cindex symbols, retaining selectively
2509a395
SL
1615@kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1616@item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
252b5132
RH
1617Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1618discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1619symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1620@ifset GENERIC
1621(such as VxWorks)
1622@end ifset
1623where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1624run-time memory.
1625
1626@samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1627or symbols needed for relocations.
1628
1629You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1630line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1631
1632@ifset GENERIC
2509a395 1633@item -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1634@cindex runtime library search path
2509a395 1635@kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1636Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
ff5dcc92 1637linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
252b5132 1638arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
ff5dcc92 1639them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
252b5132
RH
1640also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1641objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
ff5dcc92 1642@option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
252b5132
RH
1643ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1644@code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1645
ff5dcc92 1646The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
252b5132 1647SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search patch out of all the
ff5dcc92
SC
1648@option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1649runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1650options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1651gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
b45619c0 1652file systems.
252b5132 1653
ff5dcc92 1654For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 1655followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 1656the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
1657@end ifset
1658
1659@ifset GENERIC
1660@cindex link-time runtime library search path
2509a395
SL
1661@kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1662@item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
252b5132
RH
1663When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1664happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1665of the input files.
1666
1667When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1668non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1669shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
ff5dcc92 1670explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
252b5132 1671specifies the first set of directories to search. The
ff5dcc92 1672@option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
252b5132
RH
1673either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1674appearing multiple times.
1675
28c309a2
NC
1676This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1677that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1678is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1679runtime linker would do.
1680
252b5132 1681The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
ece2d90e 1682libraries:
252b5132
RH
1683@enumerate
1684@item
ff5dcc92 1685Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
252b5132 1686@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1687Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1688between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1689specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1690used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
ece2d90e
NC
1691at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1692by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1693the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
252b5132 1694@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1695On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1696@option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1697environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
252b5132 1698@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1699On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1700directories specified using @option{-L} options.
252b5132 1701@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1702For a native linker, the search the contents of the environment
1703variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
252b5132 1704@item
ec4eb78a
L
1705For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1706@code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1707libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1708@code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1709@item
252b5132
RH
1710The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1711@item
1712For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1713exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1714@end enumerate
1715
1716If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1717warning and continue with the link.
1718@end ifset
1719
1720@kindex -shared
1721@kindex -Bshareable
1722@item -shared
1723@itemx -Bshareable
1724@cindex shared libraries
1725Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1726and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
ff5dcc92 1727shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
252b5132
RH
1728undefined symbols in the link.
1729
252b5132 1730@kindex --sort-common
2509a395
SL
1731@item --sort-common
1732@itemx --sort-common=ascending
1733@itemx --sort-common=descending
de7dd2bd
NC
1734This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1735ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
1736sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
1737eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
1738between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
1739specified, then descending order is assumed.
252b5132 1740
2509a395
SL
1741@kindex --sort-section=name
1742@item --sort-section=name
bcaa7b3e
L
1743This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
1744patterns in the linker script.
1745
2509a395
SL
1746@kindex --sort-section=alignment
1747@item --sort-section=alignment
bcaa7b3e
L
1748This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
1749patterns in the linker script.
1750
252b5132 1751@kindex --split-by-file
2509a395 1752@item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
ff5dcc92 1753Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
a854a4a7
AM
1754each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
1755size of 1 if not given.
252b5132
RH
1756
1757@kindex --split-by-reloc
2509a395 1758@item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
a854a4a7 1759Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
252b5132 1760output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
a854a4a7 1761This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
252b5132
RH
1762certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
1763cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
1764that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
1765support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
1766input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
1767more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
a854a4a7 1768many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
252b5132
RH
1769
1770@kindex --stats
1771@item --stats
1772Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
1773as execution time and memory usage.
1774
2509a395 1775@kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
e2243057
RS
1776@item --sysroot=@var{directory}
1777Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
1778configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
1779that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
1780
252b5132
RH
1781@kindex --traditional-format
1782@cindex traditional format
1783@item --traditional-format
ff5dcc92
SC
1784For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
1785the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
252b5132
RH
1786use the traditional format instead.
1787
1788@cindex dbx
ff5dcc92 1789For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
252b5132
RH
1790symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
1791full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
1792@code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
ff5dcc92 1793trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
252b5132
RH
1794combine duplicate entries.
1795
2509a395
SL
1796@kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1797@item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
176355da
NC
1798Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
1799address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
1800times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
1801line.
1802@var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
1803for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
1804@samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
1805should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
1806sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
1807
2509a395
SL
1808@kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
1809@kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
1810@kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
252b5132 1811@cindex segment origins, cmd line
2509a395
SL
1812@item -Tbss=@var{org}
1813@itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
1814@itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
1815Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
a6e02871 1816@code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
252b5132 1817
2509a395
SL
1818@kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
1819@item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
258795f5
L
1820@cindex text segment origin, cmd line
1821When creating an ELF executable or shared object, it will set the address
1822of the first byte of the text segment.
1823
560e09e9
NC
1824@kindex --unresolved-symbols
1825@item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
1826Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
1827values for @samp{method}:
1828
1829@table @samp
1830@item ignore-all
da8bce14 1831Do not report any unresolved symbols.
560e09e9
NC
1832
1833@item report-all
da8bce14 1834Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
560e09e9
NC
1835
1836@item ignore-in-object-files
1837Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
1838ignore them if they come from regular object files.
1839
1840@item ignore-in-shared-libs
1841Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
1842ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
1843when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
1844libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
1845command line.
1846@end table
1847
1848The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
1849by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
1850
1851Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
1852unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
1853can change this to a warning.
1854
252b5132
RH
1855@kindex --verbose
1856@cindex verbose
1857@item --dll-verbose
308b1ffd 1858@itemx --verbose
ff5dcc92 1859Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
252b5132 1860supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
b9a8de1e 1861the linker script being used by the linker.
252b5132
RH
1862
1863@kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
1864@cindex version script, symbol versions
2509a395 1865@item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
252b5132
RH
1866Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
1867used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
36f63dca 1868about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
09e2aba4
DK
1869is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
1870see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
1871use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
1872symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
1873@xref{WIN32}.
252b5132 1874
7ce691ae 1875@kindex --warn-common
252b5132
RH
1876@cindex warnings, on combining symbols
1877@cindex combining symbols, warnings on
1878@item --warn-common
1879Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
560e09e9 1880a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practise,
252b5132
RH
1881but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
1882you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
560e09e9 1883Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practise, so you may get some
252b5132
RH
1884warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
1885
1886There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
1887
1888@table @samp
1889@item int i = 1;
1890A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
1891file.
1892
1893@item extern int i;
1894An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
1895There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
1896variable somewhere.
1897
1898@item int i;
1899A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
1900variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
1901The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
1902single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
1903size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
1904a definition of the same variable.
1905@end table
1906
1907The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
1908Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
1909just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
1910encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
1911a common symbol.
1912
1913@enumerate
1914@item
1915Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
1916definition for the symbol.
1917@smallexample
1918@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1919 overridden by definition
1920@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
1921@end smallexample
1922
1923@item
1924Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
1925the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
1926except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
1927@smallexample
1928@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
1929 overriding common
1930@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
1931@end smallexample
1932
1933@item
1934Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
1935@smallexample
1936@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
1937 of `@var{symbol}'
1938@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
1939@end smallexample
1940
1941@item
1942Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
1943@smallexample
1944@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1945 overridden by larger common
1946@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
1947@end smallexample
1948
1949@item
1950Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
1951the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
1952encountered in a different order.
1953@smallexample
1954@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1955 overriding smaller common
1956@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
1957@end smallexample
1958@end enumerate
1959
1960@kindex --warn-constructors
1961@item --warn-constructors
1962Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
1963object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
1964detect the use of global constructors.
1965
1966@kindex --warn-multiple-gp
1967@item --warn-multiple-gp
1968Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
1969This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
1970Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
1971section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
1972of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
1973base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
1974base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
1975bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
1976large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
1977values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
1978option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
1979
1980@kindex --warn-once
1981@cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
1982@cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
1983@item --warn-once
1984Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
1985which refers to it.
1986
1987@kindex --warn-section-align
1988@cindex warnings, on section alignment
1989@cindex section alignment, warnings on
1990@item --warn-section-align
1991Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
1992alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
1993The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
1994is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
1995the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
1996
8fdd7217
NC
1997@kindex --warn-shared-textrel
1998@item --warn-shared-textrel
ece2d90e 1999Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
8fdd7217 2000
a0c402a5
L
2001@kindex --warn-alternate-em
2002@item --warn-alternate-em
2003Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2004
560e09e9
NC
2005@kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2006@item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2007If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2008@option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2009This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2010
2011@kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2012@item --error-unresolved-symbols
2013This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2014it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2015
252b5132
RH
2016@kindex --whole-archive
2017@cindex including an entire archive
2018@item --whole-archive
2019For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
ff5dcc92 2020@option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
252b5132
RH
2021in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2022files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2023library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2024library. This option may be used more than once.
2025
7ec229ce 2026Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
ff5dcc92
SC
2027about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2028Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
7ec229ce
DD
2029list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2030your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2031
2509a395
SL
2032@kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2033@item --wrap=@var{symbol}
252b5132
RH
2034Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2035@var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2036undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2037@var{symbol}.
2038
2039This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2040wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2041wishes to call the system function, it should call
2042@code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2043
2044Here is a trivial example:
2045
2046@smallexample
2047void *
cc2f008e 2048__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
252b5132 2049@{
cc2f008e 2050 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
252b5132
RH
2051 return __real_malloc (c);
2052@}
2053@end smallexample
2054
ff5dcc92 2055If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
252b5132
RH
2056all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2057instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2058call the real @code{malloc} function.
2059
2060You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
ff5dcc92 2061links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
252b5132
RH
2062you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2063file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2064call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2065
6aa29e7b
JJ
2066@kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2067@item --eh-frame-hdr
2068Request creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr} section and ELF
2069@code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2070
6c1439be
L
2071@kindex --enable-new-dtags
2072@kindex --disable-new-dtags
2073@item --enable-new-dtags
2074@itemx --disable-new-dtags
2075This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2076systems may not understand them. If you specify
ff5dcc92
SC
2077@option{--enable-new-dtags}, the dynamic tags will be created as needed.
2078If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
6c1439be
L
2079created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2080those options are only available for ELF systems.
2081
2d643429 2082@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
e185dd51 2083@item --hash-size=@var{number}
2d643429
NC
2084Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2085close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2086time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2087increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2088value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2089
fdc90cb4
JJ
2090@kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2091@item --hash-style=@var{style}
2092Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2093@code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2094new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2095the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2096hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2097
35835446
JR
2098@kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2099@item --reduce-memory-overheads
2100This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
f2a8f148 2101linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
35835446 2102for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2d643429
NC
2103about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2104
4f9c04f7 2105Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2d643429 21061021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
a85785bc 2107run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2d643429
NC
2108has been used.
2109
2110The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2111enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
35835446 2112
c0065db7
RM
2113@kindex --build-id
2114@kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2115@item --build-id
2116@itemx --build-id=@var{style}
2117Request creation of @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section.
2118The contents of the note are unique bits identifying this linked
2119file. @var{style} can be @code{uuid} to use 128 random bits,
24382dca
RM
2120@code{sha1} to use a 160-bit @sc{SHA1} hash on the normative
2121parts of the output contents, @code{md5} to use a 128-bit
2122@sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of the output contents, or
2123@code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit string specified as
2124an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and @code{:}
2125characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style} is
2126omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
2127
2128The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2129that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2130unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2131to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2132file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2133string identifying the original linked file does not change.
c0065db7
RM
2134
2135Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2136@code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
252b5132
RH
2137@end table
2138
0285c67d
NC
2139@c man end
2140
36f63dca 2141@subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
252b5132 2142
0285c67d
NC
2143@c man begin OPTIONS
2144
ff5dcc92 2145The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
252b5132
RH
2146the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2147normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2148use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2149@code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2150like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2151symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2152object file).
2153
2154In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2155support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2156PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2157values by either a space or an equals sign.
2158
ff5dcc92 2159@table @gcctabopt
252b5132
RH
2160
2161@kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2162@item --add-stdcall-alias
2163If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2164as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
bb10df36 2165[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2166
2167@kindex --base-file
2168@item --base-file @var{file}
2169Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2170addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2171@file{dlltool}.
bb10df36 2172[This is an i386 PE specific option]
252b5132
RH
2173
2174@kindex --dll
2175@item --dll
2176Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
ff5dcc92 2177@option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
252b5132 2178file.
bb10df36 2179[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2180
88183869
DK
2181@kindex --enable-long-section-names
2182@kindex --disable-long-section-names
2183@item --enable-long-section-names
2184@itemx --disable-long-section-names
2185The PE variants of the Coff object format add an extension that permits
2186the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2187for Coff. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2188fully-linked executable images do not carry the Coff string table required
2189to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2190allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2191disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2192generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2193as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
3efd345c
DK
2194with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2195GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
2196information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2197option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2198section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2199when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2200image and not stripping symbols.
88183869
DK
2201[This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2202
252b5132
RH
2203@kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2204@kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2205@item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2206@itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2207If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
36f63dca 2208do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
252b5132
RH
2209only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2210resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2211undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2212@code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2213to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2214warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2215import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
ff5dcc92 2216to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
252b5132 2217feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
ff5dcc92 2218@option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
252b5132 2219mismatches are considered to be errors.
bb10df36 2220[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2221
522f09cd
KT
2222@kindex --leading-underscore
2223@kindex --no-leading-underscore
2224@item --leading-underscore
2225@itemx --no-leading-underscore
2226For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2227in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2228disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2229
252b5132
RH
2230@cindex DLLs, creating
2231@kindex --export-all-symbols
2232@item --export-all-symbols
2233If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2234be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2235otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2236explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2237attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2238option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
ece2d90e 2239@code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
b044cda1 2240@code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
ece2d90e
NC
2241exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2242re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2243such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2244@code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
b044cda1
CW
2245@code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2246Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2247not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
ece2d90e 2248extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
b044cda1 2249(obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
ece2d90e 2250These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
b044cda1 2251@code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
ece2d90e 2252@code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
b044cda1 2253@code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
ece2d90e 2254@code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
bb10df36 2255[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2256
2257@kindex --exclude-symbols
1d0a3c9c 2258@item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
252b5132
RH
2259Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2260exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
bb10df36 2261[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2262
2927aaca
NC
2263@kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2264@item --exclude-all-symbols
2265Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2266[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2267
252b5132
RH
2268@kindex --file-alignment
2269@item --file-alignment
2270Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2271file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2272512.
bb10df36 2273[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2274
2275@cindex heap size
2276@kindex --heap
2277@item --heap @var{reserve}
2278@itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5
DS
2279Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2280to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1Mb reserved, 4K
252b5132 2281committed.
bb10df36 2282[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2283
2284@cindex image base
2285@kindex --image-base
2286@item --image-base @var{value}
2287Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2288the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2289is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2290your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2291other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2292for dlls.
bb10df36 2293[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2294
2295@kindex --kill-at
2296@item --kill-at
2297If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2298symbols before they are exported.
bb10df36 2299[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2300
26d2d8a2
BF
2301@kindex --large-address-aware
2302@item --large-address-aware
b45619c0 2303If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
26d2d8a2 2304header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
b45619c0 2305greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
26d2d8a2
BF
2306or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2307section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2308[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2309
252b5132
RH
2310@kindex --major-image-version
2311@item --major-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2312Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
bb10df36 2313[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2314
2315@kindex --major-os-version
2316@item --major-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2317Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2318[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2319
2320@kindex --major-subsystem-version
2321@item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2322Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2323[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2324
2325@kindex --minor-image-version
2326@item --minor-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2327Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2328[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2329
2330@kindex --minor-os-version
2331@item --minor-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2332Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2333[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2334
2335@kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2336@item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2337Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2338[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2339
2340@cindex DEF files, creating
2341@cindex DLLs, creating
2342@kindex --output-def
2343@item --output-def @var{file}
2344The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2345file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2346(which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2347library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2348automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
bb10df36 2349[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2350
b044cda1
CW
2351@cindex DLLs, creating
2352@kindex --out-implib
2353@item --out-implib @var{file}
2354The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain an
2355import lib corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This
2356import lib (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a}
560e09e9 2357may be used to link clients against the generated DLL; this behaviour
b044cda1
CW
2358makes it possible to skip a separate @code{dlltool} import library
2359creation step.
bb10df36 2360[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2361
2362@kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2363@item --enable-auto-image-base
2364Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, unless one is specified
2365using the @code{--image-base} argument. By using a hash generated
2366from the dllname to create unique image bases for each DLL, in-memory
2367collisions and relocations which can delay program execution are
2368avoided.
bb10df36 2369[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2370
2371@kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2372@item --disable-auto-image-base
2373Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2374user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2375default.
bb10df36 2376[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2377
2378@cindex DLLs, linking to
2379@kindex --dll-search-prefix
2380@item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
489d0400 2381When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
ece2d90e 2382search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
560e09e9 2383@code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
b044cda1
CW
2384between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2385uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
ece2d90e 2386@code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
bb10df36 2387[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2388
2389@kindex --enable-auto-import
2390@item --enable-auto-import
ece2d90e
NC
2391Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2392DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
4d8907ac
DS
2393building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2394'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2395to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2396specification published by Microsoft.
2397
e2a83dd0
NC
2398Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2399data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2400placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2401around a problem with consts that is described here:
2402http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2403
4d8907ac
DS
2404Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2405see this message:
0d888aac 2406
ece2d90e 2407"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
0d888aac
CW
2408documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2409
ece2d90e
NC
2410This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2411ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
c0065db7
RM
2412allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2413fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2414constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2f8d8971
NC
2415multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2416this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2417of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2418the warning, and exit.
2419
2420There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2421data type of the exported variable:
0d888aac 2422
2fa9fc65
NC
2423One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2424of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
560e09e9 2425this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2fa9fc65 2426
c0065db7
RM
2427A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2428that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2429there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
0d888aac
CW
2430a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2431
2432@example
2433extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2434extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2435 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2436@end example
2437
2438or
2439
2440@example
2441extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2442extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2443 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2444@end example
2445
c0065db7 2446For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2f8d8971 2447is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
0d888aac
CW
2448
2449@example
2450extern struct s extern_struct;
c0065db7 2451extern_struct.field -->
0d888aac
CW
2452 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2453@end example
2454
c406afaf
NC
2455or
2456
2457@example
2458extern long long extern_ll;
2459extern_ll -->
2460 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2461@end example
2462
2fa9fc65 2463A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
c0065db7 2464'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
560e09e9 2465@code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practise that
0d888aac 2466requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
c0065db7
RM
2467building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2468merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2469between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
0d888aac
CW
2470constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2471
2472Original:
2473@example
2474--foo.h
2475extern int arr[];
2476--foo.c
2477#include "foo.h"
2478void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2479 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2480@}
2481@end example
2482
2483Solution 1:
2484@example
2485--foo.h
2486extern int arr[];
2487--foo.c
2488#include "foo.h"
2489void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2490 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2491 volatile int *parr = arr;
2492 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2493@}
2494@end example
2495
2496Solution 2:
2497@example
2498--foo.h
2499/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2500#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2501 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2502#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2503#else
2504#define FOO_IMPORT
2505#endif
2506extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2507--foo.c
2508#include "foo.h"
2509void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2510 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2511@}
2512@end example
2513
c0065db7 2514A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
0d888aac
CW
2515library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2516for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2517functions).
bb10df36 2518[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2519
2520@kindex --disable-auto-import
2521@item --disable-auto-import
c0065db7 2522Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
b044cda1 2523@code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2524[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2525
2fa9fc65
NC
2526@kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2527@item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2528If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2529that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2530a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
c0065db7 2531environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
bb10df36 2532[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65
NC
2533
2534@kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2535@item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2536Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
2537DLLs. This is the default.
bb10df36 2538[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65 2539
b044cda1
CW
2540@kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2541@item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2542Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
bb10df36 2543[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2544
252b5132
RH
2545@kindex --section-alignment
2546@item --section-alignment
2547Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2548addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
bb10df36 2549[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2550
2551@cindex stack size
2552@kindex --stack
2553@item --stack @var{reserve}
2554@itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5
DS
2555Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2556to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2Mb reserved, 4K
252b5132 2557committed.
bb10df36 2558[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2559
2560@kindex --subsystem
2561@item --subsystem @var{which}
2562@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2563@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2564Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2565legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
33f362e1
NC
2566@code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2567the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2568@var{which}.
bb10df36 2569[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2570
2f563b51
DK
2571The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2572of the PE file header:
2573[These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2574
2575@kindex --dynamicbase
2576@item --dynamicbase
2577The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2578randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2579Vista for i386 PE targets.
2580
2581@kindex --forceinteg
2582@item --forceinteg
2583Code integrity checks are enforced.
2584
2585@kindex --nxcompat
2586@item --nxcompat
2587The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2588This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2589
2590@kindex --no-isolation
2591@item --no-isolation
2592Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2593
2594@kindex --no-seh
2595@item --no-seh
2596The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2597this image.
2598
2599@kindex --no-bind
2600@item --no-bind
2601Do not bind this image.
2602
2603@kindex --wdmdriver
2604@item --wdmdriver
2605The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
2606
2607@kindex --tsaware
2608@item --tsaware
2609The image is Terminal Server aware.
2610
252b5132
RH
2611@end table
2612
0285c67d
NC
2613@c man end
2614
93fd0973
SC
2615@ifset M68HC11
2616@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2617
2618@c man begin OPTIONS
2619
2620The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2621memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2622
2623@table @gcctabopt
2624
2625@kindex --no-trampoline
2626@item --no-trampoline
2627This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
2628is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
2629instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
2630
2631@kindex --bank-window
2632@item --bank-window @var{name}
2633This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
2634the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
2635The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
2636paging and addresses within the memory window.
2637
2638@end table
2639
2640@c man end
2641@end ifset
2642
7fb9f789
NC
2643@ifset M68K
2644@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
2645
2646@c man begin OPTIONS
2647
2648The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
2649when linking for 68K targets.
2650
2651@table @gcctabopt
2652
2653@kindex --got
2654@item --got=@var{type}
2655This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
2656@var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
2657@samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
2658Info entry for @file{ld}.
2659
2660@end table
2661
2662@c man end
2663@end ifset
2664
252b5132
RH
2665@ifset UsesEnvVars
2666@node Environment
2667@section Environment Variables
2668
0285c67d
NC
2669@c man begin ENVIRONMENT
2670
560e09e9 2671You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
36f63dca
NC
2672@ifclear SingleFormat
2673@code{GNUTARGET},
2674@end ifclear
2675@code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
252b5132 2676
36f63dca 2677@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
2678@kindex GNUTARGET
2679@cindex default input format
2680@code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
2681use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
2682of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
ff5dcc92 2683@code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
252b5132
RH
2684of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
2685attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
2686this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
2687there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
2688object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
2689BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
2690in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
36f63dca 2691@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
2692
2693@kindex LDEMULATION
2694@cindex default emulation
2695@cindex emulation, default
2696@code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
2697@samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
2698behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
2699available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
2700the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
2701variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
2702linker was configured.
252b5132
RH
2703
2704@kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
2705@cindex demangling, default
2706Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
2707@code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
2708default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
2709a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
2710may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
2711options.
2712
0285c67d
NC
2713@c man end
2714@end ifset
2715
252b5132
RH
2716@node Scripts
2717@chapter Linker Scripts
2718
2719@cindex scripts
2720@cindex linker scripts
2721@cindex command files
2722Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
2723written in the linker command language.
2724
2725The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
2726the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
2727the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
2728more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
2729direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
2730described below.
2731
2732The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
2733yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
2734linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
2735to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
2736such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
2737
2738You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
2739line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
2740default linker script.
2741
2742You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
2743to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
2744Linker Scripts}.
2745
2746@menu
2747* Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
2748* Script Format:: Linker Script Format
2749* Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
2750* Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
2751* Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
2752* SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
2753* MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
2754* PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
2755* VERSION:: VERSION Command
2756* Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
2757* Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
2758@end menu
2759
2760@node Basic Script Concepts
2761@section Basic Linker Script Concepts
2762@cindex linker script concepts
2763We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
2764describe the linker script language.
2765
2766The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
2767file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
2768@dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
2769The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
2770purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
2771among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
2772section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
2773in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
2774
2775Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
2776also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
2777contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which mean that
2778the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
2779A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
2780area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
2781loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
2782which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
2783of debugging information.
2784
2785Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
2786first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
2787the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
2788@dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
2789section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
2790same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
2791is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
2792(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
2793based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
2794RAM address would be the VMA.
2795
2796You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
2797program with the @samp{-h} option.
2798
2799Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
2800@dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
2801has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
2802information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
2803will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
2804static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
2805referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
2806
2807You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
2808program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
2809option.
2810
2811@node Script Format
2812@section Linker Script Format
2813@cindex linker script format
2814Linker scripts are text files.
2815
2816You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
2817either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
2818symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
2819generally ignored.
2820
2821Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
2822If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
2823otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
2824double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
2825file name.
2826
2827You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
2828@samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
2829to whitespace.
2830
2831@node Simple Example
2832@section Simple Linker Script Example
2833@cindex linker script example
2834@cindex example of linker script
2835Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
2836
2837The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
2838@samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
2839memory layout of the output file.
2840
2841The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
2842describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
2843code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
2844@samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
2845Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
2846your input files.
2847
2848For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
28490x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
2850linker script which will do that:
2851@smallexample
2852SECTIONS
2853@{
2854 . = 0x10000;
2855 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
2856 . = 0x8000000;
2857 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
2858 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
2859@}
2860@end smallexample
2861
2862You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
2863followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
2864descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
2865
252b5132
RH
2866The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
2867sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
2868counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
2869other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
2870current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
2871incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
2872@samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
2873
2874The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
2875required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
2876after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
2877which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
2878wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
2879means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
2880
2881Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
2882@samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
2883@samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
2884
2885The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
2886the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
2887at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
2888output section, the value of the location counter will be
2889@samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
2890effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
58434bc1 2891immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
252b5132
RH
2892
2893The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
2894alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
2895example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
2896sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
2897may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
2898sections.
2899
2900That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
2901
2902@node Simple Commands
2903@section Simple Linker Script Commands
2904@cindex linker script simple commands
2905In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
2906
2907@menu
2908* Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
2909* File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
2910@ifclear SingleFormat
2911* Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
2912@end ifclear
2913
4a93e180 2914* REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
252b5132
RH
2915* Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
2916@end menu
2917
2918@node Entry Point
36f63dca 2919@subsection Setting the Entry Point
252b5132
RH
2920@kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
2921@cindex start of execution
2922@cindex first instruction
2923@cindex entry point
2924The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
2925point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
2926entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
2927@smallexample
2928ENTRY(@var{symbol})
2929@end smallexample
2930
2931There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
2932entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
2933stopping when one of them succeeds:
2934@itemize @bullet
a1ab1d2a 2935@item
252b5132 2936the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
a1ab1d2a 2937@item
252b5132 2938the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
a1ab1d2a 2939@item
3ab904c4
NC
2940the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
2941targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
2942check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
a1ab1d2a 2943@item
252b5132 2944the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
a1ab1d2a 2945@item
252b5132
RH
2946The address @code{0}.
2947@end itemize
2948
2949@node File Commands
36f63dca 2950@subsection Commands Dealing with Files
252b5132
RH
2951@cindex linker script file commands
2952Several linker script commands deal with files.
2953
2954@table @code
2955@item INCLUDE @var{filename}
2956@kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
2957@cindex including a linker script
2958Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
2959be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
ff5dcc92 2960with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
252b5132
RH
296110 levels deep.
2962
4006703d
NS
2963You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
2964@code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
2965
252b5132
RH
2966@item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
2967@itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
2968@kindex INPUT(@var{files})
2969@cindex input files in linker scripts
2970@cindex input object files in linker scripts
2971@cindex linker script input object files
2972The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
2973in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
2974
2975For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
2976a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
2977then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
2978
2979In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
2980script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
2981
e3f2db7f
AO
2982In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
2983with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
2984located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
2985for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
2986open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
2987linker will search through the archive library search path. See the
2988description of @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
252b5132 2989
ff5dcc92 2990If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
252b5132
RH
2991name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
2992@samp{-l}.
2993
2994When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
2995files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
2996script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
2997
2998@item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
2999@itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3000@kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3001@cindex grouping input files
3002The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3003files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3004new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3005in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3006
b717d30e
JJ
3007@item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3008@itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3009@kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3010This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3011commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3012as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3013with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3014when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3015@option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3016and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3017setting afterwards.
3018
252b5132
RH
3019@item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3020@kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
b45619c0 3021@cindex output file name in linker script
252b5132
RH
3022The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3023@code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3024@samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3025Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
3026precedence.
3027
3028You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3029output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3030
3031@item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3032@kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3033@cindex library search path in linker script
3034@cindex archive search path in linker script
3035@cindex search path in linker script
3036The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
ff5dcc92 3037@command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
252b5132
RH
3038@code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3039on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
3040are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3041the command line option are searched first.
3042
3043@item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3044@kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3045@cindex first input file
3046The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3047that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3048though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3049when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3050first file.
3051@end table
3052
3053@ifclear SingleFormat
3054@node Format Commands
36f63dca 3055@subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
252b5132
RH
3056A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3057
3058@table @code
3059@item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3060@itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3061@kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3062@cindex output file format in linker script
3063The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3064output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
024531e2 3065exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
252b5132
RH
3066(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
3067line option takes precedence.
3068
3069You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3070formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3071This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3072desired endianness.
3073
3074If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3075will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3076output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3077used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3078
3079For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3080command:
3081@smallexample
3082OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3083@end smallexample
3084This says that the default format for the output file is
3085@samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3086option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3087format.
3088
3089@item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3090@kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3091@cindex input file format in linker script
3092The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3093files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3094This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3095(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3096is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3097command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3098@end table
3099@end ifclear
3100
4a93e180
NC
3101@node REGION_ALIAS
3102@subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3103@kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3104@cindex region alias
3105@cindex region names
3106
3107Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3108@ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3109
3110@smallexample
3111REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3112@end smallexample
3113
3114The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3115memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3116to memory regions. An example follows.
3117
3118Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3119memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3120that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3121non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3122access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3123read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3124sections:
3125
3126@itemize @bullet
3127@item
3128@code{.text} program code;
3129@item
3130@code{.rodata} read-only data;
3131@item
3132@code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3133@item
3134@code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3135@end itemize
3136
3137The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3138part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3139output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3140systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3141@code{C}:
3142@multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3143@item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
3144@item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
3145@item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3146@item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3147@item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3148@end multitable
3149The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3150loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3151the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3152the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3153
3154The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3155includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3156memory layout:
3157@smallexample
3158INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3159
3160SECTIONS
3161 @{
3162 .text :
3163 @{
3164 *(.text)
3165 @} > REGION_TEXT
3166 .rodata :
3167 @{
3168 *(.rodata)
3169 rodata_end = .;
3170 @} > REGION_RODATA
3171 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3172 @{
3173 data_start = .;
3174 *(.data)
3175 @} > REGION_DATA
3176 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3177 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3178 .bss :
3179 @{
3180 *(.bss)
3181 @} > REGION_BSS
3182 @}
3183@end smallexample
3184
3185Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3186regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3187variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3188@table @code
3189@item A
3190Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3191@smallexample
3192MEMORY
3193 @{
3194 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3195 @}
3196
3197REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3198REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3199REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3200REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3201@end smallexample
3202@item B
3203Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3204into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3205@code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3206@smallexample
3207MEMORY
3208 @{
3209 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3210 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3211 @}
3212
3213REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3214REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3215REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3216REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3217@end smallexample
3218@item C
3219Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3220@code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3221initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3222system start into the @code{RAM}.
3223@smallexample
3224MEMORY
3225 @{
3226 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3227 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3228 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3229 @}
3230
3231REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3232REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3233REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3234REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3235@end smallexample
3236@end table
3237
3238It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3239@code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3240necessary:
3241@smallexample
3242#include <string.h>
3243
3244extern char data_start [];
3245extern char data_size [];
3246extern char data_load_start [];
3247
3248void copy_data(void)
3249@{
3250 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3251 @{
3252 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3253 @}
3254@}
3255@end smallexample
3256
252b5132 3257@node Miscellaneous Commands
36f63dca 3258@subsection Other Linker Script Commands
252b5132
RH
3259There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3260
3261@table @code
3262@item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3263@kindex ASSERT
3264@cindex assertion in linker script
3265Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3266with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3267
3268@item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3269@kindex EXTERN
3270@cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3271Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3272symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3273modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3274each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3275command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3276
3277@item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3278@kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3279@cindex common allocation in linker script
3280This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
ff5dcc92 3281to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
252b5132
RH
3282output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3283
4818e05f
AM
3284@item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3285@kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3286@cindex common allocation in linker script
3287This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3288command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3289to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3290
53d25da6
AM
3291@item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3292@kindex INSERT
3293@cindex insert user script into default script
3294This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3295augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3296inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3297@var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3298default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3299sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3300linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3301insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3302linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3303default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3304of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3305to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3306is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3307
3308@smallexample
3309SECTIONS
3310@{
3311 OVERLAY :
3312 @{
3313 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3314 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3315 @}
3316@}
3317INSERT AFTER .text;
3318@end smallexample
3319
252b5132
RH
3320@item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3321@kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3322@cindex cross references
ff5dcc92 3323This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
252b5132
RH
3324references among certain output sections.
3325
3326In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3327using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3328will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3329errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3330a function defined in the other section.
3331
3332The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
ff5dcc92 3333@command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
252b5132
RH
3334an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3335@code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3336names.
3337
3338@ifclear SingleFormat
3339@item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3340@kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3341@cindex machine architecture
3342@cindex architecture
3343Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3344of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3345architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3346the @samp{-f} option.
3347@end ifclear
3348@end table
3349
3350@node Assignments
3351@section Assigning Values to Symbols
3352@cindex assignment in scripts
3353@cindex symbol definition, scripts
3354@cindex variables, defining
3355You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
73ae6183 3356the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
252b5132
RH
3357
3358@menu
3359* Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
3360* PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
7af8e998 3361* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
73ae6183 3362* Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
252b5132
RH
3363@end menu
3364
3365@node Simple Assignments
3366@subsection Simple Assignments
3367
3368You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3369
3370@table @code
3371@item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3372@itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3373@itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3374@itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3375@itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3376@itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3377@itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3378@itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3379@itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3380@end table
3381
3382The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3383@var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3384defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3385
3386The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
b5666f2f 3387may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
252b5132
RH
3388
3389The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3390
3391Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3392
3393You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3394statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3395section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3396
3397The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3398expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3399
3400Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3401assignments may be used:
3402
3403@smallexample
3404floating_point = 0;
3405SECTIONS
3406@{
3407 .text :
3408 @{
3409 *(.text)
3410 _etext = .;
3411 @}
156e34dd 3412 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
252b5132
RH
3413 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3414@}
3415@end smallexample
3416@noindent
3417In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3418zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3419the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3420defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3421upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3422
3423@node PROVIDE
3424@subsection PROVIDE
3425@cindex PROVIDE
3426In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3427only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3428the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3429@samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3430@samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3431@code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3432@samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3433@code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3434
3435Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3436@smallexample
3437SECTIONS
3438@{
3439 .text :
3440 @{
3441 *(.text)
3442 _etext = .;
3443 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3444 @}
3445@}
3446@end smallexample
3447
3448In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3449underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3450the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3451underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3452If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3453linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3454
7af8e998
L
3455@node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3456@subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3457@cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3458Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3459hidden and won't be exported.
3460
73ae6183
NC
3461@node Source Code Reference
3462@subsection Source Code Reference
3463
3464Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3465intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3466a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3467symbol that does not have a value.
3468
3469Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3470transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3471stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3472prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3473mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3474of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3475variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
3476linker script variable might be referred to as:
3477
3478@smallexample
3479 extern int foo;
3480@end smallexample
3481
3482But in the linker script it might be defined as:
3483
3484@smallexample
3485 _foo = 1000;
3486@end smallexample
3487
3488In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
3489transformation has taken place.
3490
3491When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
3492things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
3493in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
3494second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
3495table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
3496contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
3497value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
3498
3499@smallexample
3500 int foo = 1000;
3501@end smallexample
3502
3503creates a entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
3504holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
3505number 1000 is initially stored.
3506
3507When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
3508first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
3509memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
3510So:
3511
3512@smallexample
3513 foo = 1;
3514@end smallexample
3515
3516looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
3517associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
3518address. Whereas:
3519
3520@smallexample
3521 int * a = & foo;
3522@end smallexample
3523
3524looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets it address
3525and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
3526the variable @samp{a}.
3527
3528Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
3529the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
3530an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
3531
3532@smallexample
3533 foo = 1000;
3534@end smallexample
3535
3536creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
3537the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
3538address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
3539linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
3540access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
3541
3542Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
3543you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
3544use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
3545section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
3546linker script contains these declarations:
3547
3548@smallexample
3549@group
3550 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
3551 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM) - 1;
3552 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
3553@end group
3554@end smallexample
3555
3556Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
3557
3558@smallexample
3559@group
3560 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
c0065db7 3561
73ae6183
NC
3562 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
3563@end group
3564@end smallexample
3565
3566Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
3567
252b5132 3568@node SECTIONS
36f63dca 3569@section SECTIONS Command
252b5132
RH
3570@kindex SECTIONS
3571The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
3572into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
3573
3574The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
3575@smallexample
3576SECTIONS
3577@{
3578 @var{sections-command}
3579 @var{sections-command}
3580 @dots{}
3581@}
3582@end smallexample
3583
3584Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
3585
3586@itemize @bullet
3587@item
3588an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
3589@item
3590a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3591@item
3592an output section description
3593@item
3594an overlay description
3595@end itemize
3596
3597The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
3598@code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
3599those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
3600understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
3601the layout of the output file.
3602
3603Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
3604below.
3605
3606If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
3607linker will place each input section into an identically named output
3608section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
3609input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
3610example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
3611in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
3612
3613@menu
3614* Output Section Description:: Output section description
3615* Output Section Name:: Output section name
3616* Output Section Address:: Output section address
3617* Input Section:: Input section description
3618* Output Section Data:: Output section data
3619* Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
3620* Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
3621* Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
3622* Overlay Description:: Overlay description
3623@end menu
3624
3625@node Output Section Description
36f63dca 3626@subsection Output Section Description
252b5132
RH
3627The full description of an output section looks like this:
3628@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 3629@group
7e7d5768 3630@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759
NC
3631 [AT(@var{lma})]
3632 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
3633 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
3634 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
3635 @{
3636 @var{output-section-command}
3637 @var{output-section-command}
3638 @dots{}
562d3460 3639 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
3640@end group
3641@end smallexample
3642
3643Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
3644
3645The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
3646name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
3647The line breaks and other white space are optional.
3648
3649Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
3650
3651@itemize @bullet
3652@item
3653a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3654@item
3655an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
3656@item
3657data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
3658@item
3659a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
3660@end itemize
3661
3662@node Output Section Name
36f63dca 3663@subsection Output Section Name
252b5132
RH
3664@cindex name, section
3665@cindex section name
3666The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
3667meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
3668support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
3669must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
3670example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
3671output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
3672names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
3673quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
3674characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
3675commas must be quoted.
3676
3677The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
3678Discarding}.
3679
3680@node Output Section Address
2a16d82a 3681@subsection Output Section Address
252b5132
RH
3682@cindex address, section
3683@cindex section address
3684The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
ea5cae92
NC
3685address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
3686is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
3687
3688If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
3689section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
3690to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
3691alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
3692contained within the output section.
3693
3694The output section address heuristic is as follows:
3695
3696@itemize @bullet
3697@item
3698If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
3699is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
3700in that region.
3701
3702@item
3703If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
3704regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
3705section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
3706be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
3707
3708@item
3709If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
3710the output address will be based on the current value of the location
3711counter.
3712@end itemize
3713
3714@noindent
3715For example:
3716
252b5132
RH
3717@smallexample
3718.text . : @{ *(.text) @}
3719@end smallexample
ea5cae92 3720
252b5132
RH
3721@noindent
3722and
ea5cae92 3723
252b5132
RH
3724@smallexample
3725.text : @{ *(.text) @}
3726@end smallexample
ea5cae92 3727
252b5132
RH
3728@noindent
3729are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
3730@samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
3731counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
ea5cae92
NC
3732counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
3733input sections.
252b5132
RH
3734
3735The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
3736For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
3737so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
3738do something like this:
3739@smallexample
3740.text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
3741@end smallexample
3742@noindent
3743This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
3744aligned upward to the specified value.
3745
3746Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
6ce340f1
NC
3747location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
3748sections are ignored).
252b5132
RH
3749
3750@node Input Section
36f63dca 3751@subsection Input Section Description
252b5132
RH
3752@cindex input sections
3753@cindex mapping input sections to output sections
3754The most common output section command is an input section description.
3755
3756The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
3757You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
3758in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
3759map the input files into your memory layout.
3760
3761@menu
3762* Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
3763* Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
3764* Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
3765* Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
3766* Input Section Example:: Input section example
3767@end menu
3768
3769@node Input Section Basics
36f63dca 3770@subsubsection Input Section Basics
252b5132
RH
3771@cindex input section basics
3772An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
3773by a list of section names in parentheses.
3774
3775The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
3776describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
3777
3778The most common input section description is to include all input
3779sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
3780include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
3781@smallexample
3782*(.text)
3783@end smallexample
3784@noindent
18625d54
CM
3785Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
3786of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
3787match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
3788example:
252b5132 3789@smallexample
b4346c09 3790*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
252b5132 3791@end smallexample
765b7cbe
JB
3792will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o} and
3793@file{otherfile.o} to be included.
252b5132
RH
3794
3795There are two ways to include more than one section:
3796@smallexample
3797*(.text .rdata)
3798*(.text) *(.rdata)
3799@end smallexample
3800@noindent
3801The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
3802@samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
b6bf44ba
AM
3803first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
3804they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
252b5132
RH
3805@samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
3806@samp{.rdata} input sections.
3807
3808You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
3809You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
3810needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
3811@smallexample
3812data.o(.data)
3813@end smallexample
3814
967928e9
AM
3815You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
3816matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
3817with no whitespace around the colon.
3818
3819@table @samp
3820@item archive:file
3821matches file within archive
3822@item archive:
3823matches the whole archive
3824@item :file
3825matches file but not one in an archive
3826@end table
3827
3828Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
3829wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
3830single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
3831@samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
3832within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
3833also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
3834other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
3835from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
3836command.
3837
252b5132
RH
3838If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
3839the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
3840commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
3841@smallexample
3842data.o
3843@end smallexample
3844
967928e9
AM
3845When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
3846and does not contain any wild card
252b5132
RH
3847characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
3848name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
3849did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
3850though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
3851@code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
3852the archive search path.
3853
3854@node Input Section Wildcards
36f63dca 3855@subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
252b5132
RH
3856@cindex input section wildcards
3857@cindex wildcard file name patterns
3858@cindex file name wildcard patterns
3859@cindex section name wildcard patterns
3860In an input section description, either the file name or the section
3861name or both may be wildcard patterns.
3862
3863The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
3864pattern for the file name.
3865
3866The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
3867
3868@table @samp
3869@item *
3870matches any number of characters
3871@item ?
3872matches any single character
3873@item [@var{chars}]
3874matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
3875character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
3876@samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
3877@item \
3878quotes the following character
3879@end table
3880
3881When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
3882will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
3883Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
3884exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
3885@samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
3886a @samp{/} character.
3887
3888File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
3889specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
3890does not search directories to expand wildcards.
3891
3892If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
3893appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
3894will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
3895sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
3896@file{data.o} rule will not be used:
3897@smallexample
3898.data : @{ *(.data) @}
3899.data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
3900@end smallexample
3901
bcaa7b3e 3902@cindex SORT_BY_NAME
252b5132
RH
3903Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
3904in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
bcaa7b3e
L
3905this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
3906pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
3907@code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
252b5132
RH
3908into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
3909
bcaa7b3e
L
3910@cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
3911@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
3912difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
3913ascending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
3914
3915@cindex SORT
3916@code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
3917
3918When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
3919can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
3920
3921@enumerate
3922@item
3923@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
3924It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if 2
3925sections have the same name.
3926@item
3927@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
3928It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if 2
3929sections have the same alignment.
3930@item
c0065db7 3931@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
bcaa7b3e
L
3932treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
3933@item
3934@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
3935is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
3936@item
3937All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
3938@end enumerate
3939
3940When both command line section sorting option and linker script
3941section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
3942takes precedence over the command line option.
3943
3944If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
3945command line option will make the section sorting command to be
3946treated as nested sorting command.
3947
3948@enumerate
3949@item
3950@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
3951@option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
3952@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
3953@item
3954@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
3955@option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
3956@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
3957@end enumerate
3958
3959If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
3960command line option will be ignored.
3961
252b5132
RH
3962If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
3963@samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
3964precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
3965
3966This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
3967files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
3968sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
3969The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
3970with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
3971linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
3972@smallexample
3973@group
3974SECTIONS @{
3975 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3976 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
3977 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3978 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3979@}
3980@end group
3981@end smallexample
3982
3983@node Input Section Common
36f63dca 3984@subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
252b5132
RH
3985@cindex common symbol placement
3986@cindex uninitialized data placement
3987A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
3988file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
3989linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
3990named @samp{COMMON}.
3991
3992You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
3993other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
3994particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
3995input files are placed in another section.
3996
3997In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
3998@samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
3999@smallexample
4000.bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4001@end smallexample
4002
4003@cindex scommon section
4004@cindex small common symbols
4005Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4006example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4007symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4008different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4009the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4010symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4011to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4012locations.
4013
4014@cindex [COMMON]
4015You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4016notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4017@samp{*(COMMON)}.
4018
4019@node Input Section Keep
36f63dca 4020@subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
252b5132
RH
4021@cindex KEEP
4022@cindex garbage collection
4023When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
a1ab1d2a 4024it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
252b5132
RH
4025This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4026with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
bcaa7b3e 4027@code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
252b5132
RH
4028
4029@node Input Section Example
36f63dca 4030@subsubsection Input Section Example
252b5132
RH
4031The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4032to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4033start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4034@samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4035follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4036@samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4037@samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4038All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4039files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4040
4041@smallexample
4042@group
4043SECTIONS @{
4044 outputa 0x10000 :
4045 @{
4046 all.o
4047 foo.o (.input1)
4048 @}
36f63dca
NC
4049@end group
4050@group
252b5132
RH
4051 outputb :
4052 @{
4053 foo.o (.input2)
4054 foo1.o (.input1)
4055 @}
36f63dca
NC
4056@end group
4057@group
252b5132
RH
4058 outputc :
4059 @{
4060 *(.input1)
4061 *(.input2)
4062 @}
4063@}
4064@end group
a1ab1d2a 4065@end smallexample
252b5132
RH
4066
4067@node Output Section Data
36f63dca 4068@subsection Output Section Data
252b5132
RH
4069@cindex data
4070@cindex section data
4071@cindex output section data
4072@kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4073@kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4074@kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4075@kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4076@kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4077You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4078@code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4079an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4080parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4081value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4082counter.
4083
4084The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4085store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4086bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4087stored.
4088
4089For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4090of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4091@smallexample
4092BYTE(1)
4093LONG(addr)
4094@end smallexample
4095
4096When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4097same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4098target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4099@code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4100@code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4101
4102If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4103which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4104When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4105true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4106endianness of the first input object file.
4107
36f63dca 4108Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
2b5fc1f5
NC
4109between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4110@smallexample
4111SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4112@end smallexample
4113whereas this will work:
4114@smallexample
4115SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4116@end smallexample
4117
252b5132
RH
4118@kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4119@cindex holes, filling
4120@cindex unspecified memory
4121You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4122current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4123otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4124gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
a139d329 4125with the value of the expression, repeated as
252b5132
RH
4126necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4127point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4128than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4129different parts of an output section.
4130
4131This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
563e308f 4132value @samp{0x90}:
252b5132 4133@smallexample
563e308f 4134FILL(0x90909090)
252b5132
RH
4135@end smallexample
4136
4137The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
9673c93c 4138section attribute, but it only affects the
252b5132
RH
4139part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4140entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
9673c93c 4141precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
a139d329 4142expression.
252b5132
RH
4143
4144@node Output Section Keywords
36f63dca 4145@subsection Output Section Keywords
252b5132
RH
4146There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4147commands.
4148
4149@table @code
4150@kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4151@cindex input filename symbols
4152@cindex filename symbols
4153@item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4154The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4155The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4156file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4157the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4158
4159This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4160normally used for any other object file format.
4161
4162@kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4163@cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4164@cindex constructors, arranging in link
4165@item CONSTRUCTORS
4166When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4167unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4168destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4169arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4170automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4171For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4172linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4173@code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4174ignored for other object file formats.
4175
4176The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
7e69709c
AM
4177constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4178Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4179the start and end of the global destructors. The
252b5132
RH
4180first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4181of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4182compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4183formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4184@code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4185the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4186destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4187@code{exit}.
4188
4189For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4190arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4191addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4192and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4193linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4194runtime code expects to see.
4195
4196@smallexample
4197 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4198 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4199 *(.ctors)
4200 LONG(0)
4201 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4202 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4203 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4204 *(.dtors)
4205 LONG(0)
4206 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4207@end smallexample
4208
4209If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4210which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4211are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4212are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
bcaa7b3e
L
4213command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4214@code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4215@samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
252b5132
RH
4216@samp{*(.dtors)}.
4217
4218Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4219and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4220need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4221scripts.
4222
4223@end table
4224
4225@node Output Section Discarding
36f63dca 4226@subsection Output Section Discarding
252b5132
RH
4227@cindex discarding sections
4228@cindex sections, discarding
4229@cindex removing sections
74541ad4
AM
4230The linker will not create output sections with no contents. This is
4231for convenience when referring to input sections that may or may not
4232be present in any of the input files. For example:
252b5132 4233@smallexample
49c13adb 4234.foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
252b5132
RH
4235@end smallexample
4236@noindent
4237will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
74541ad4
AM
4238@samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4239sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
4240space in an output section will also create the output section.
4241
a0976ea4 4242The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
74541ad4
AM
4243on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4244symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
a0976ea4
AM
4245the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4246section is discarded.
252b5132
RH
4247
4248@cindex /DISCARD/
4249The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4250input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4251section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4252
4253@node Output Section Attributes
36f63dca 4254@subsection Output Section Attributes
252b5132
RH
4255@cindex output section attributes
4256We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4257like this:
0c71d759 4258
252b5132 4259@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4260@group
7e7d5768 4261@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759
NC
4262 [AT(@var{lma})]
4263 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4264 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4265 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4266 @{
4267 @var{output-section-command}
4268 @var{output-section-command}
4269 @dots{}
562d3460 4270 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
4271@end group
4272@end smallexample
0c71d759 4273
252b5132
RH
4274We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4275@var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4276remaining section attributes.
4277
a1ab1d2a 4278@menu
252b5132
RH
4279* Output Section Type:: Output section type
4280* Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
bbf115d3 4281* Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
7e7d5768 4282* Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
0c71d759 4283* Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
252b5132
RH
4284* Output Section Region:: Output section region
4285* Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4286* Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4287@end menu
4288
4289@node Output Section Type
36f63dca 4290@subsubsection Output Section Type
252b5132
RH
4291Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4292parentheses. The following types are defined:
4293
4294@table @code
4295@item NOLOAD
4296The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4297loaded into memory when the program is run.
4298@item DSECT
4299@itemx COPY
4300@itemx INFO
4301@itemx OVERLAY
4302These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4303rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4304marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4305section when the program is run.
4306@end table
4307
4308@kindex NOLOAD
4309@cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4310@cindex loading, preventing
4311The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4312the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4313the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4314@samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
2e76e85a 4315need to be loaded when the program is run.
252b5132
RH
4316@smallexample
4317@group
4318SECTIONS @{
4319 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4320 @dots{}
4321@}
4322@end group
4323@end smallexample
4324
4325@node Output Section LMA
36f63dca 4326@subsubsection Output Section LMA
562d3460 4327@kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
252b5132
RH
4328@kindex AT(@var{lma})
4329@cindex load address
4330@cindex section load address
4331Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
ea5cae92
NC
4332@ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
4333@pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
4334specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
4335address is optional.
6bdafbeb 4336
ea5cae92
NC
4337The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
4338specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
4339takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
4340load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
4341region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
dc0b6aa0
AM
4342
4343If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
ea5cae92
NC
4344section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
4345load address:
4346
4347@itemize @bullet
4348@item
4349If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
4350the LMA address as well.
4351
4352@item
4353If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
4354
4355@item
4356Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
4357with the current section, and this region contains at least one
4358section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
4359VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
4360the last section in the located region.
4361
4362@item
4363If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
4364that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
4365
4366@item
4367If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
4368section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
4369@end itemize
252b5132
RH
4370
4371@cindex ROM initialized data
4372@cindex initialized data in ROM
4373This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
4374example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
4375called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
4376@samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
4377even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
4378uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
4379defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
4380counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
4381
4382@smallexample
4383@group
4384SECTIONS
4385 @{
4386 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
a1ab1d2a 4387 .mdata 0x2000 :
252b5132
RH
4388 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
4389 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
4390 .bss 0x3000 :
4391 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
4392@}
4393@end group
4394@end smallexample
4395
4396The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
4397this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
4398the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
4399how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
4400script.
4401
4402@smallexample
4403@group
4404extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
4405char *src = &_etext;
4406char *dst = &_data;
4407
ea5cae92
NC
4408/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
4409while (dst < &_edata)
252b5132 4410 *dst++ = *src++;
252b5132 4411
ea5cae92 4412/* Zero bss. */
252b5132
RH
4413for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
4414 *dst = 0;
4415@end group
4416@end smallexample
4417
bbf115d3
L
4418@node Forced Output Alignment
4419@subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
4420@kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
4421@cindex forcing output section alignment
4422@cindex output section alignment
7270c5ed 4423You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN.
bbf115d3 4424
7e7d5768
AM
4425@node Forced Input Alignment
4426@subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
4427@kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
4428@cindex forcing input section alignment
4429@cindex input section alignment
4430You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
4431SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
4432sections, whether larger or smaller.
4433
0c71d759
NC
4434@node Output Section Constraint
4435@subsubsection Output Section Constraint
4436@kindex ONLY_IF_RO
4437@kindex ONLY_IF_RW
4438@cindex constraints on output sections
4439You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
4440of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
4441read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
4442@code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
4443
252b5132 4444@node Output Section Region
36f63dca 4445@subsubsection Output Section Region
252b5132
RH
4446@kindex >@var{region}
4447@cindex section, assigning to memory region
4448@cindex memory regions and sections
4449You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
4450using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
4451
4452Here is a simple example:
4453@smallexample
4454@group
4455MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
4456SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
4457@end group
4458@end smallexample
4459
4460@node Output Section Phdr
36f63dca 4461@subsubsection Output Section Phdr
252b5132
RH
4462@kindex :@var{phdr}
4463@cindex section, assigning to program header
4464@cindex program headers and sections
4465You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
4466using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
4467one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
4468assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
4469@code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
4470linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
4471
4472Here is a simple example:
4473@smallexample
4474@group
4475PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
4476SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
4477@end group
4478@end smallexample
4479
4480@node Output Section Fill
36f63dca 4481@subsubsection Output Section Fill
252b5132
RH
4482@kindex =@var{fillexp}
4483@cindex section fill pattern
4484@cindex fill pattern, entire section
4485You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
4486@samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
4487(@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
4488within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
a139d329
AM
4489alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
4490necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
9673c93c 4491of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
a139d329
AM
4492an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
4493fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
9673c93c 4494other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
a139d329
AM
4495pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
4496expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
252b5132
RH
4497
4498You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
9673c93c 4499output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
252b5132
RH
4500
4501Here is a simple example:
4502@smallexample
4503@group
563e308f 4504SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
252b5132
RH
4505@end group
4506@end smallexample
4507
4508@node Overlay Description
36f63dca 4509@subsection Overlay Description
252b5132
RH
4510@kindex OVERLAY
4511@cindex overlays
4512An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
4513are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
4514the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
4515copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
4516required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
4517can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
4518than another.
4519
4520Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
4521@code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
4522output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
4523command is as follows:
4524@smallexample
4525@group
4526OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
4527 @{
4528 @var{secname1}
4529 @{
4530 @var{output-section-command}
4531 @var{output-section-command}
4532 @dots{}
4533 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4534 @var{secname2}
4535 @{
4536 @var{output-section-command}
4537 @var{output-section-command}
4538 @dots{}
4539 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4540 @dots{}
4541 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4542@end group
4543@end smallexample
4544
4545Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
4546section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
4547section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
4548those within the general @code{SECTIONS} contruct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
4549except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
4550sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
4551
4552The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
4553addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
4554memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
4555whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
4556and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
4557and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
4558
4559If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there any references
4560among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since the sections
4561all run at the same address, it normally does not make sense for one
4562section to refer directly to another. @xref{Miscellaneous Commands,
4563NOCROSSREFS}.
4564
4565For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
34711ca3 4566provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
252b5132
RH
4567defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
4568@code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
4569the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
4570within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
4571symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
4572
4573At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
4574the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
4575
4576Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
4577@code{SECTIONS} construct.
4578@smallexample
4579@group
4580 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
4581 @{
4582 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
4583 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
4584 @}
4585@end group
4586@end smallexample
4587@noindent
4588This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
4589address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
4590@samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
34711ca3 4591following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
252b5132
RH
4592@code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
4593@code{__load_stop_text1}.
4594
4595C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
4596like the following.
4597
4598@smallexample
4599@group
4600 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
4601 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
4602 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
4603@end group
4604@end smallexample
4605
4606Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
4607everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
4608example could have been written identically as follows.
4609
4610@smallexample
4611@group
4612 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4613 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
4614 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
252b5132 4615 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4616 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
4617 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
252b5132
RH
4618 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
4619@end group
4620@end smallexample
4621
4622@node MEMORY
36f63dca 4623@section MEMORY Command
252b5132
RH
4624@kindex MEMORY
4625@cindex memory regions
4626@cindex regions of memory
4627@cindex allocating memory
4628@cindex discontinuous memory
4629The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
4630memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
4631
4632The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
4633memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
4634may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
4635can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
4636set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
4637regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
4638around to fit into the available regions.
4639
4640A linker script may contain at most one use of the @code{MEMORY}
4641command. However, you can define as many blocks of memory within it as
4642you wish. The syntax is:
4643@smallexample
4644@group
a1ab1d2a 4645MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4646 @{
4647 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
4648 @dots{}
4649 @}
4650@end group
4651@end smallexample
4652
4653The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
4654region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
4655Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4656with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4a93e180
NC
4657must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
4658add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
4659command.
252b5132
RH
4660
4661@cindex memory region attributes
4662The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
4663whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
4664not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
4665@ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
4666section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
4667the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
4668them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
4669
4670The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
4671@table @samp
4672@item R
4673Read-only section
4674@item W
4675Read/write section
4676@item X
4677Executable section
4678@item A
4679Allocatable section
4680@item I
4681Initialized section
4682@item L
4683Same as @samp{I}
4684@item !
c09e9a8c 4685Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
252b5132
RH
4686@end table
4687
4688If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
4689@samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
4690attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
4691in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
4692attributes.
4693
4694@kindex ORIGIN =
4695@kindex o =
4696@kindex org =
9cd6d51a
NC
4697The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
4698the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
4699cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
4700abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
4701@code{ORG}).
252b5132
RH
4702
4703@kindex LENGTH =
4704@kindex len =
4705@kindex l =
4706The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
4707region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
9cd6d51a
NC
4708be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
4709@code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
252b5132
RH
4710
4711In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
4712available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
4713and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
4714linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
4715is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
4716or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
4717explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
4718region.
4719
4720@smallexample
4721@group
a1ab1d2a 4722MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4723 @{
4724 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
4725 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
4726 @}
4727@end group
4728@end smallexample
4729
4730Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
4731specific output sections into that memory region by using the
4732@samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
4733a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
4734output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
4735was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
4736the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
4737output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
4738region, the linker will issue an error message.
4739
3ec57632 4740It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
c0065db7 4741expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
3ec57632
NC
4742@code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
4743
4744@smallexample
4745@group
c0065db7 4746 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
3ec57632
NC
4747@end group
4748@end smallexample
4749
252b5132
RH
4750@node PHDRS
4751@section PHDRS Command
4752@kindex PHDRS
4753@cindex program headers
4754@cindex ELF program headers
4755@cindex program segments
4756@cindex segments, ELF
4757The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
4758@dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
4759loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
4760program with the @samp{-p} option.
4761
4762When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
4763reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
4764program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
4765This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
4766interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
4767
4768The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
4769in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
4770precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
4771the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
4772not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
4773
4774The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
4775generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
4776ignore @code{PHDRS}.
4777
4778This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
4779@code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
4780
4781@smallexample
4782@group
4783PHDRS
4784@{
4785 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
4786 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
4787@}
4788@end group
4789@end smallexample
4790
4791The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
4792of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
4793header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4794with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5c1a3f0f
NS
4795must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
4796is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
252b5132
RH
4797
4798Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
4799system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
4800specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
4801sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
4802attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
4803Section Phdr}.
4804
4805It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
4806merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
4807repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
4808contain the section.
4809
4810If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
4811then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
4812not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
4813convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
4814placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
4815default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
4816segment at all.
4817
4818@kindex FILEHDR
4819@kindex PHDRS
5c1a3f0f 4820You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
252b5132
RH
4821the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
4822The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
4823file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5c1a3f0f 4824include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
4100cea3
AM
4825segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
4826these keywords.
252b5132
RH
4827
4828The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
4829value of the keyword.
4830
4831@table @asis
4832@item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
4833Indicates an unused program header.
4834
4835@item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
4836Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
4837the file.
4838
4839@item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
4840Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
4841
4842@item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
4843Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
4844found.
4845
4846@item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
4847Indicates a segment holding note information.
4848
4849@item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
4850A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
4851ABI.
4852
4853@item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
4854Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
4855
4856@item @var{expression}
4857An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
4858be used for types not defined above.
4859@end table
4860
4861You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
4862in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
4863@code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
4864Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
4865output section attribute.
4866
4867The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
4868which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
4869explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
4870an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
4871header.
4872
4873Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
4874headers used on a native ELF system.
4875
4876@example
4877@group
4878PHDRS
4879@{
4880 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
4881 interp PT_INTERP ;
4882 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
4883 data PT_LOAD ;
4884 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
4885@}
4886
4887SECTIONS
4888@{
4889 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
4890 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
4891 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
4892 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
4893 @dots{}
4894 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
4895 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
4896 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
4897 @dots{}
4898@}
4899@end group
4900@end example
4901
4902@node VERSION
4903@section VERSION Command
4904@kindex VERSION @{script text@}
4905@cindex symbol versions
4906@cindex version script
4907@cindex versions of symbols
4908The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
4909only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
4910symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
4911a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
4912shared library.
4913
4914You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
4915you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
4916also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
4917
4918The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
4919@smallexample
4920VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
4921@end smallexample
4922
4923The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
4924Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
4925version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
4926version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
4927version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
4928scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
4929library.
4930
4931The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
4932examples.
4933
4934@smallexample
4935VERS_1.1 @{
4936 global:
4937 foo1;
4938 local:
a1ab1d2a
UD
4939 old*;
4940 original*;
4941 new*;
252b5132
RH
4942@};
4943
4944VERS_1.2 @{
4945 foo2;
4946@} VERS_1.1;
4947
4948VERS_2.0 @{
4949 bar1; bar2;
c0065db7 4950 extern "C++" @{
86043bbb 4951 ns::*;
bb1515f2
MF
4952 "f(int, double)";
4953 @};
252b5132
RH
4954@} VERS_1.2;
4955@end smallexample
4956
4957This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
4958version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
4959The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
4960a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
313e35ee
AM
4961of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
4962symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
4963is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
4964in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
86043bbb
MM
4965However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
4966name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
252b5132
RH
4967
4968Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
4969depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
4970to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
4971
4972Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
4973depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
4974and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
4975
4976When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
4977specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
4978unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
a981ed6f 4979unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
ae5a3597
AM
4980somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
4981wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
4982wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
4983set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
4984ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
252b5132
RH
4985
4986The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
4987they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
4988could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
4989However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
4990
0f6bf451 4991Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
6b9b879a
JJ
4992in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
4993symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
4994won't.
4995
4996@smallexample
7c9c73be 4997@{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
9d201f2f 4998@end smallexample
6b9b879a 4999
252b5132
RH
5000When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5001symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5002requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5003shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5004loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5005linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5006application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5007way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5008all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5009search for each symbol reference.
5010
5011The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5012doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5013that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5014functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5015the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5016required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5017that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5018versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5019the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5020
5021There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5022first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5023source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5024script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5025maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5026@smallexample
5027__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5028@end smallexample
5029@noindent
5030in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5031be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5032The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
96a94295
L
5033@samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5034takes precedence over a version script.
252b5132
RH
5035
5036The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5037function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5038an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5039version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5040linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5041
5042To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5043source file. Here is an example:
5044
5045@smallexample
5046__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5047__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5048__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5049__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5050@end smallexample
5051
5052In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5053unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5054example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5055@samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5056
5057When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5058some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5059this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5060@samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5061declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5062you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5063
5064If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5065within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
36f63dca 5066(i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
252b5132
RH
5067specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5068
cb840a31
L
5069You can also specify the language in the version script:
5070
5071@smallexample
5072VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5073@end smallexample
5074
c0065db7 5075The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
cb840a31
L
5076The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5077demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
bb1515f2
MF
5078patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5079@samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
cb840a31 5080
86043bbb
MM
5081Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5082described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5083or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5084the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5085whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5086cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5087might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5088should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5089expect when you upgrade.
5090
252b5132
RH
5091@node Expressions
5092@section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5093@cindex expressions
5094@cindex arithmetic
5095The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5096that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5097expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5098host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5099
5100You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5101
5102The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5103expressions.
5104
5105@menu
5106* Constants:: Constants
0c71d759 5107* Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
252b5132 5108* Symbols:: Symbol Names
ecca9871 5109* Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
252b5132
RH
5110* Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5111* Operators:: Operators
5112* Evaluation:: Evaluation
5113* Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5114* Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5115@end menu
5116
5117@node Constants
5118@subsection Constants
5119@cindex integer notation
5120@cindex constants in linker scripts
5121All constants are integers.
5122
5123As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5124octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
8a308ae8
NC
5125hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
5126@samp{H} for hexadeciaml, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
5127@samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5128value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
252b5132
RH
5129
5130@cindex scaled integers
5131@cindex K and M integer suffixes
5132@cindex M and K integer suffixes
5133@cindex suffixes for integers
5134@cindex integer suffixes
5135In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5136constant by
5137@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5138@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5139@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5140@code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5141@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5142@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5143@tex
5144${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5145@end tex
5146@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8a308ae8
NC
5147respectively. For example, the following
5148all refer to the same quantity:
5149
252b5132 5150@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5151_fourk_1 = 4K;
5152_fourk_2 = 4096;
5153_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
8a308ae8 5154_fourk_4 = 10000o;
252b5132
RH
5155@end smallexample
5156
8a308ae8
NC
5157Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5158conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5159
0c71d759
NC
5160@node Symbolic Constants
5161@subsection Symbolic Constants
5162@cindex symbolic constants
5163@kindex CONSTANT
5164It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5165the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5166
5167@table @code
5168@item MAXPAGESIZE
5169@kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5170The target's maximum page size.
5171
5172@item COMMONPAGESIZE
5173@kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5174The target's default page size.
5175@end table
5176
5177So for example:
5178
5179@smallexample
5180 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
5181@end smallexample
5182
5183will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5184supported by the target.
5185
252b5132
RH
5186@node Symbols
5187@subsection Symbol Names
5188@cindex symbol names
5189@cindex names
5190@cindex quoted symbol names
5191@kindex "
5192Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5193and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5194Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5195specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5196keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5197@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5198"SECTION" = 9;
5199"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
252b5132
RH
5200@end smallexample
5201
5202Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5203to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5204whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5205
ecca9871
L
5206@node Orphan Sections
5207@subsection Orphan Sections
5208@cindex orphan
5209Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5210are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5211script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5212output file, but it has to guess as to where they should be
5213placed. The linker uses a simple heuristic to do this. It
5214attempts to place orphan sections after non-orphan sections of the
5215same attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc.
5216If there is not enough room to do this then it places
5217at the end of the file.
5218
5219For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type as
5220well as section flag.
5221
41911f68 5222If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
a61ca861 5223the linker will automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols:
41911f68
NC
5224__start_SECNAME and __end_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
5225section. These indicate the start address and end address of the
5226orphaned section respectively. Note: most section names are not
5227representable as C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.}
5228character.
5229
252b5132
RH
5230@node Location Counter
5231@subsection The Location Counter
5232@kindex .
5233@cindex dot
5234@cindex location counter
5235@cindex current output location
5236The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5237current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5238location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5239within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5240anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5241
5242@cindex holes
5243Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5244moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
dc0b6aa0
AM
5245location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5246and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5247doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
252b5132
RH
5248
5249@smallexample
5250SECTIONS
5251@{
5252 output :
5253 @{
5254 file1(.text)
5255 . = . + 1000;
5256 file2(.text)
5257 . += 1000;
5258 file3(.text)
563e308f 5259 @} = 0x12345678;
252b5132
RH
5260@}
5261@end smallexample
5262@noindent
5263In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5264located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5265followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5266@file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
563e308f 5267@samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
252b5132
RH
5268specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5269
5c6bbab8
NC
5270@cindex dot inside sections
5271Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5272current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
69da35b5 5273statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5c6bbab8
NC
5274absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5275however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5276not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5277
5278@smallexample
5279SECTIONS
5280@{
5281 . = 0x100
5282 .text: @{
5283 *(.text)
5284 . = 0x200
5285 @}
5286 . = 0x500
5287 .data: @{
5288 *(.data)
5289 . += 0x600
5290 @}
5291@}
5292@end smallexample
5293
5294The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5295and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5296the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5297much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5298move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5299and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5300the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5301the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5302
b5666f2f
AM
5303@cindex dot outside sections
5304Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5305output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5306needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5307
5308@smallexample
5309SECTIONS
5310@{
5311 start_of_text = . ;
5312 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5313 end_of_text = . ;
5314
5315 start_of_data = . ;
5316 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5317 end_of_data = . ;
5318@}
5319@end smallexample
5320
5321If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5322not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5323between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5324should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5325blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5326the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5327sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5328statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5329special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5330place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5331as follows:
5332
5333@smallexample
5334SECTIONS
5335@{
5336 start_of_text = . ;
5337 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5338 end_of_text = . ;
5339
5340 start_of_data = . ;
5341 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5342 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5343 end_of_data = . ;
5344@}
5345@end smallexample
5346
5347This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5348@code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5349placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5350assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5351a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
5352section. So you could write:
5353
5354@smallexample
5355SECTIONS
5356@{
5357 start_of_text = . ;
5358 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5359 end_of_text = . ;
5360
5361 . = . ;
5362 start_of_data = . ;
5363 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5364 end_of_data = . ;
5365@}
5366@end smallexample
5367
5368Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
5369@code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
5370
252b5132
RH
5371@need 2000
5372@node Operators
5373@subsection Operators
5374@cindex operators for arithmetic
5375@cindex arithmetic operators
5376@cindex precedence in expressions
5377The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
5378the standard bindings and precedence levels:
5379@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5380@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5381@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5382@smallexample
5383precedence associativity Operators Notes
5384(highest)
53851 left ! - ~ (1)
53862 left * / %
53873 left + -
53884 left >> <<
53895 left == != > < <= >=
53906 left &
53917 left |
53928 left &&
53939 left ||
539410 right ? :
539511 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
5396(lowest)
5397@end smallexample
5398Notes:
a1ab1d2a 5399(1) Prefix operators
252b5132
RH
5400(2) @xref{Assignments}.
5401@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5402@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5403@tex
5404\vskip \baselineskip
5405%"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
5406\hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
5407\hrule
5408\halign
5409{\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
5410height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5411&Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
5412height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5413\noalign{\hrule}
5414height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5415&highest&&&&&\cr
5416% '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
a1ab1d2a 5417&1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
252b5132
RH
5418&2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
5419&3&&left&&+ -&\cr
5420&4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
5421&5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
5422&6&&left&&\&&\cr
5423&7&&left&&|&\cr
5424&8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
5425&9&&left&&||&\cr
5426&10&&right&&? :&\cr
5427&11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
5428&lowest&&&&&\cr
5429height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
5430\hrule}
5431@end tex
5432@iftex
5433{
5434@obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
5435@dag@quad Prefix operators.
5436@ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
5437}
5438@end iftex
5439@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5440
5441@node Evaluation
5442@subsection Evaluation
5443@cindex lazy evaluation
5444@cindex expression evaluation order
5445The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
5446an expression when absolutely necessary.
5447
5448The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
5449address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
5450regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
5451as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
5452
5453However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
5454until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
5455other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
5456for use in the symbol assignment expression.
5457
5458The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
5459assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
5460allocation.
5461
5462Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
5463@samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
5464
5465If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
5466available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
5467following
5468@smallexample
5469@group
5470SECTIONS
5471 @{
a1ab1d2a 5472 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
252b5132
RH
5473 @{ *(.text) @}
5474 @}
5475@end group
5476@end smallexample
5477@noindent
5478will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
5479address}.
5480
5481@node Expression Section
5482@subsection The Section of an Expression
5483@cindex expression sections
5484@cindex absolute expressions
5485@cindex relative expressions
5486@cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
5487@cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
5488@cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
7542af2a
AM
5489Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
5490relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
5491using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
5492value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
5493symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
5494operations.
5495
abf4be64
AM
5496Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
5497section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
5498address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
5499@code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
5500functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
7542af2a
AM
5501
5502When the linker evaluates an expression, the result depends on where
5503the expression is located in a linker script. Expressions appearing
5504outside an output section definitions are evaluated with all terms
5505first being converted to absolute addresses before applying operators,
5506and evaluate to an absolute address result. Expressions appearing
5507inside an output section definition are evaluated with more complex
5508rules, but the aim is to treat terms as relative addresses and produce
5509a relative address result. In particular, an assignment of a number
5510to a symbol results in a symbol relative to the output section with an
5511offset given by the number. So, in the following simple example,
252b5132 5512
7542af2a
AM
5513@smallexample
5514@group
5515SECTIONS
5516 @{
5517 . = 0x100;
5518 __executable_start = 0x100;
5519 .data :
5520 @{
5521 . = 0x10;
5522 __data_start = 0x10;
5523 *(.data)
5524 @}
5525 @dots{}
5526 @}
5527@end group
5528@end smallexample
252b5132 5529
7542af2a
AM
5530both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
5531address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
5532@code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
5533section in the second two assignments.
252b5132 5534
7542af2a
AM
5535For expressions appearing inside an output section definition
5536involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute addresses, ld
5537follows these rules to evaluate terms:
5538
5539@itemize @bullet
5540@item
5541Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
5542relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
5543and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
5544@item
5545Unary operations on an absolute address, and binary operations on one
5546or more absolute addresses or on two relative addresses not in the
5547same section, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute
5548address before applying the operator.
5549@end itemize
5550
5551The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
5552
5553@itemize @bullet
5554@item
5555An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
5556@item
5557The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
5558@item
5559The result of other operations on relative addresses (after above
5560conversions) is a relative address in the same section as the operand(s).
5561@item
5562The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
5563conversions) is an absolute address.
5564@end itemize
252b5132
RH
5565
5566You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
5567to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
5568create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
5569section @samp{.data}:
5570@smallexample
5571SECTIONS
5572 @{
5573 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
5574 @}
5575@end smallexample
5576@noindent
5577If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
5578@samp{.data} section.
5579
7542af2a
AM
5580Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
5581particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
5582
252b5132
RH
5583@node Builtin Functions
5584@subsection Builtin Functions
5585@cindex functions in expressions
5586The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
5587use in linker script expressions.
5588
5589@table @code
5590@item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5591@kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5592@cindex expression, absolute
5593Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
5594of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
5595value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
5596normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
5597
5598@item ADDR(@var{section})
5599@kindex ADDR(@var{section})
5600@cindex section address in expression
7542af2a 5601Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
252b5132 5602script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
7542af2a
AM
5603the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
5604@code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
5605@code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
5606the other two will be absolute:
252b5132
RH
5607@smallexample
5608@group
5609SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5610 .output1 :
a1ab1d2a 5611 @{
252b5132
RH
5612 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
5613 @dots{}
5614 @}
5615 .output :
5616 @{
5617 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
5618 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
5619 @}
5620@dots{} @}
5621@end group
5622@end smallexample
5623
876f4090
NS
5624@item ALIGN(@var{align})
5625@itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
5626@kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
5627@kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
252b5132
RH
5628@cindex round up location counter
5629@cindex align location counter
876f4090
NS
5630@cindex round up expression
5631@cindex align expression
5632Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
5633to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
5634doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
5635arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
5636expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
5637equivalent to @code{ALIGN(., @var{align})}).
5638
5639Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
5640next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
5641variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
5642input sections:
252b5132
RH
5643@smallexample
5644@group
5645SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5646 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
5647 *(.data)
5648 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
5649 @}
5650@dots{} @}
5651@end group
5652@end smallexample
5653@noindent
5654The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
5655a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
5656a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
5657of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
5658
5659The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
5660
362c1d1a
NS
5661@item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5662@kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5663@cindex section alignment
5664Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5665been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5666evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5667the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
5668value in that section.
5669@smallexample
5670@group
5671SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5672 .output @{
5673 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
5674 @dots{}
5675 @}
5676@dots{} @}
5677@end group
5678@end smallexample
5679
252b5132
RH
5680@item BLOCK(@var{exp})
5681@kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
5682This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
5683scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
5684section.
5685
2d20f7bf
JJ
5686@item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5687@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5688This is equivalent to either
5689@smallexample
5690(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
5691@end smallexample
5692or
5693@smallexample
5694(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
5695@end smallexample
5696@noindent
5697depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
5698for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
5699@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
5700If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
5701memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
5702bytes in the on-disk file.
5703
5704This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
5705any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
5706@var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
5707be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
5708working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
5709
5710@noindent
5711Example:
5712@smallexample
5713 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
5714@end smallexample
5715
5716@item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5717@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5718This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
5719evaluation purposes.
5720
5721@smallexample
5722 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
5723@end smallexample
5724
a4f5ad88
JJ
5725@item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5726@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5727This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
5728@samp{-z relro} option is used. Second argument is returned.
5729When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
5730does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
5731@var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
5732boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
5733it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
5734@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}.
5735
5736@smallexample
5737 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
5738@end smallexample
5739
252b5132
RH
5740@item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5741@kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5742@cindex symbol defaults
5743Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
420e579c
HPN
5744defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
5745return 0. You can use this function to provide
252b5132
RH
5746default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
5747shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
5748the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
5749existed, its value is preserved:
5750
5751@smallexample
5752@group
5753SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5754 .text : @{
5755 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
5756 @dots{}
5757 @}
5758 @dots{}
5759@}
5760@end group
5761@end smallexample
5762
3ec57632
NC
5763@item LENGTH(@var{memory})
5764@kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
5765Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5766
252b5132
RH
5767@item LOADADDR(@var{section})
5768@kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
5769@cindex section load address in expression
7542af2a 5770Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
252b5132
RH
5771Section LMA}).
5772
5773@kindex MAX
5774@item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5775Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5776
5777@kindex MIN
5778@item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5779Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5780
5781@item NEXT(@var{exp})
5782@kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
5783@cindex unallocated address, next
5784Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
5785This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
5786use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
5787output file, the two functions are equivalent.
5788
3ec57632
NC
5789@item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5790@kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5791Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5792
ba916c8a
MM
5793@item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5794@kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5795Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
5796value has been given for this segment (with a command-line @samp{-T}
5797option) that value will be returned; otherwise the value will be
5798@var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option can only
5799be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
7542af2a 5800``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
ba916c8a
MM
5801name.
5802
252b5132
RH
5803@item SIZEOF(@var{section})
5804@kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
5805@cindex section size
5806Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5807been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5808evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5809@code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
5810@smallexample
5811@group
5812SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5813 .output @{
5814 .start = . ;
5815 @dots{}
5816 .end = . ;
5817 @}
5818 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
5819 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
5820@dots{} @}
5821@end group
5822@end smallexample
5823
5824@item SIZEOF_HEADERS
5825@itemx sizeof_headers
5826@kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
5827@cindex header size
5828Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
5829information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
5830this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
5831choose, to facilitate paging.
5832
5833@cindex not enough room for program headers
5834@cindex program headers, not enough room
5835When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
5836@code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
5837number of program headers before it has determined all the section
5838addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
5839additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
5840room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
5841the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
5842script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
5843you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
5844command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
5845@end table
5846
5847@node Implicit Linker Scripts
5848@section Implicit Linker Scripts
5849@cindex implicit linker scripts
5850If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
5851an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
5852linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
5853linker will report an error.
5854
5855An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
5856
5857Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
5858assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
5859commands.
5860
5861Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
5862at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
5863read. This can affect archive searching.
5864
5865@ifset GENERIC
5866@node Machine Dependent
5867@chapter Machine Dependent Features
5868
5869@cindex machine dependencies
ff5dcc92
SC
5870@command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
5871sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
252b5132
RH
5872functionality are not listed.
5873
5874@menu
36f63dca
NC
5875@ifset H8300
5876* H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
5877@end ifset
5878@ifset I960
5879* i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
5880@end ifset
5881@ifset ARM
5882* ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
5883@end ifset
5884@ifset HPPA
5885* HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
5886@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
5887@ifset M68K
5888* M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
5889@end ifset
3c3bdf30 5890@ifset MMIX
36f63dca 5891* MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
3c3bdf30 5892@end ifset
2469cfa2 5893@ifset MSP430
36f63dca 5894* MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
2469cfa2 5895@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
5896@ifset M68HC11
5897* M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
5898@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
5899@ifset POWERPC
5900* PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
5901@end ifset
5902@ifset POWERPC64
5903* PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
5904@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
5905@ifset SPU
5906* SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
5907@end ifset
74459f0e 5908@ifset TICOFF
ff5dcc92 5909* TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
74459f0e 5910@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
5911@ifset WIN32
5912* WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
5913@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
5914@ifset XTENSA
5915* Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
5916@end ifset
252b5132
RH
5917@end menu
5918@end ifset
5919
252b5132
RH
5920@ifset H8300
5921@ifclear GENERIC
5922@raisesections
5923@end ifclear
5924
5925@node H8/300
ff5dcc92 5926@section @command{ld} and the H8/300
252b5132
RH
5927
5928@cindex H8/300 support
ff5dcc92 5929For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
252b5132
RH
5930you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
5931
5932@table @emph
5933@cindex relaxing on H8/300
5934@item relaxing address modes
ff5dcc92 5935@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
252b5132
RH
5936targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
5937program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
5938respectively.
5939
5940@cindex synthesizing on H8/300
5941@item synthesizing instructions
5942@c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really?
ff5dcc92 5943@command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
252b5132
RH
5944sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
5945page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
5946(That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
5947@samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
5948top page of memory).
1502569c
NC
5949
5950@item bit manipulation instructions
c0065db7 5951@command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
1502569c 5952biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
c0065db7 5953which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
1502569c
NC
5954page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
5955(That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
c0065db7 5956@samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c
NC
5957the top page of memory).
5958
5959@item system control instructions
c0065db7
RM
5960@command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
596132 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
1502569c
NC
5962changes them to use 16 bit address form.
5963(That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
c0065db7 5964@samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c 5965the top page of memory).
252b5132
RH
5966@end table
5967
5968@ifclear GENERIC
5969@lowersections
5970@end ifclear
5971@end ifset
5972
36f63dca 5973@ifclear GENERIC
c2dcd04e 5974@ifset Renesas
36f63dca 5975@c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
c2dcd04e
NC
5976@c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
5977@node Renesas
5978@chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
36f63dca 5979
c2dcd04e
NC
5980@command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
5981H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
5982options are required for these chips.
36f63dca
NC
5983@end ifset
5984@end ifclear
5985
5986@ifset I960
5987@ifclear GENERIC
5988@raisesections
5989@end ifclear
5990
5991@node i960
5992@section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
5993
5994@cindex i960 support
5995
5996You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
5997specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
5998family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
5999incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
6000linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
6001libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
6002search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
6003
6004For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
6005well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
6006paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
6007the names
6008
6009@smallexample
6010@group
6011try
6012libtry.a
6013tryca
6014libtryca.a
6015@end group
6016@end smallexample
6017
6018@noindent
6019The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
6020two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
6021
6022You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
6023the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
6024use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
6025specifies a library.
6026
6027@cindex @option{--relax} on i960
6028@cindex relaxing on i960
6029@command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
6030you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
6031@code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
6032them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
6033instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
6034instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
6035target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
6036not itself call any subroutines).
6037
48229727
JB
6038@cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
6039@kindex --fix-cortex-a8
6040@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
6041The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
6042
6043The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
6044
85fdf906
AH
6045@kindex --merge-exidx-entries
6046@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
6047The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
6048
36f63dca
NC
6049@ifclear GENERIC
6050@lowersections
6051@end ifclear
6052@end ifset
6053
6054@ifset ARM
6055@ifclear GENERIC
6056@raisesections
6057@end ifclear
6058
93fd0973
SC
6059@ifset M68HC11
6060@ifclear GENERIC
6061@raisesections
6062@end ifclear
6063
6064@node M68HC11/68HC12
6065@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6066
6067@cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6068
6069@subsection Linker Relaxation
6070
6071For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6072optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6073
6074@table @emph
6075@cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6076@item relaxing address modes
6077@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6078targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6079program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6080respectively.
6081
6082@command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6083transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6084page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6085
6086@item relaxing gcc instruction group
6087When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6088of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6089addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6090@code{bset} instructions.
6091
6092@end table
6093
6094@subsection Trampoline Generation
6095
6096@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6097@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6098For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6099call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
c0065db7 6100will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
93fd0973
SC
6101trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6102case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6103point to the function trampoline.
6104
6105@ifclear GENERIC
6106@lowersections
6107@end ifclear
6108@end ifset
6109
36f63dca 6110@node ARM
3674e28a 6111@section @command{ld} and the ARM family
36f63dca
NC
6112
6113@cindex ARM interworking support
6114@kindex --support-old-code
6115For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
b45619c0 6116between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
36f63dca
NC
6117been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6118line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6119libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6120option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
6121given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6122which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6123the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6124non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6125
6126@cindex thumb entry point
6127@cindex entry point, thumb
6128@kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6129The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6130@samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6131But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6132branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6133executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6134
ce11ba6c
KT
6135@cindex PE import table prefixing
6136@kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6137The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6138the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
6139elememt prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
6140import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6141
e489d0ae
PB
6142@cindex BE8
6143@kindex --be8
6144The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
6145executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian objects.
6146The resulting image will contain big-endian data and little-endian code.
6147
3674e28a
PB
6148@cindex TARGET1
6149@kindex --target1-rel
6150@kindex --target1-abs
6151The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6152@samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6153or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6154and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6155
6156@cindex TARGET2
6157@kindex --target2=@var{type}
6158The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6159@samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6160meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6161@table @samp
6162@item rel
eeac373a
PB
6163@samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6164@item abs
6165@samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
3674e28a
PB
6166@item got-rel
6167@samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6168@end table
6169
319850b4
JB
6170@cindex FIX_V4BX
6171@kindex --fix-v4bx
6172The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6173specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6174interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6175also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6176
6177In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6178linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6179@code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6180
6181In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6182relocations are ignored.
6183
845b51d6
PB
6184@cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6185@kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6186Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6187relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6188
6189@smallexample
6190TST rM, #1
6191MOVEQ PC, rM
6192BX Rn
6193@end smallexample
6194
6195This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6196and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
6197condition flags, so may cause incorrect progrm behavior in rare cases.
6198
33bfe774
JB
6199@cindex USE_BLX
6200@kindex --use-blx
6201The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6202BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6203situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6204code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6205each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6206
6207This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6208specify it if you are using that target.
6209
c6dd86c6
JB
6210@cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6211@kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6212The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6213bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6214instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6215to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6216the support code can read the intended values.
6217
6218The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6219intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6220and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6221intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6222full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6223you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6224
6225If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6226enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6227@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6228mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6229vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6230@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6231
6232If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6233potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6234such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6235first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6236instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6237the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6238are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6239
bf21ed78
MS
6240@cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6241@kindex --no-enum-size-warning
726150b7 6242The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
bf21ed78
MS
6243warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6244enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6245linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6246using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6247not be diagnosed.
a9dc9481
JM
6248
6249@cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6250@kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6251The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6252warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6253@code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6254linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6255using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
bf21ed78 6256
726150b7
NC
6257@cindex PIC_VENEER
6258@kindex --pic-veneer
6259The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6260ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6261is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6262@samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6263
6264@cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6265@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6266The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6267code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6268perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6269placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6270controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6271The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
6272duplicate stubs, increasing the code sizw. The linker will try to
6273group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6274code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6275where they should be placed.
6276
6277The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6278@option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
07d72278 6279placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
726150b7
NC
6280branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
6281placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
6282value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6283exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
6284A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6285linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6286from the input sections.
6287
6288The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
6289@samp{N = +1}.
6290
1a51c1a4
NC
6291Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
6292only, because it relies on object files properties not present
6293otherwise.
6294
36f63dca
NC
6295@ifclear GENERIC
6296@lowersections
6297@end ifclear
6298@end ifset
6299
6300@ifset HPPA
6301@ifclear GENERIC
6302@raisesections
6303@end ifclear
6304
6305@node HPPA ELF32
6306@section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
6307@cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
6308@kindex --multi-subspace
6309When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
6310import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
6311The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
6312stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
6313multiple sub-spaces.
6314
6315@cindex HPPA stub grouping
6316@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6317Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
6318stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6319@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6320sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6321a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6322the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6323conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6324prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6325A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6326branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6327@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6328@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6329detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6330positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6331
6332Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6333single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6334create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6335large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6336
6337@ifclear GENERIC
6338@lowersections
6339@end ifclear
6340@end ifset
6341
7fb9f789
NC
6342@ifset M68K
6343@ifclear GENERIC
6344@raisesections
6345@end ifclear
6346
6347@node M68K
6348@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6349
6350@cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
6351@kindex --got=@var{type}
6352The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
6353The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
6354@samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
6355the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
6356@samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
6357entries only at non-negative offsets.
6358@samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
6359entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
6360support such GOTs.
6361@samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
6362output file. All GOT references from a single input object
6363file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
6364files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
6365
6366@ifclear GENERIC
6367@lowersections
6368@end ifclear
6369@end ifset
6370
36f63dca
NC
6371@ifset MMIX
6372@ifclear GENERIC
6373@raisesections
6374@end ifclear
6375
6376@node MMIX
6377@section @code{ld} and MMIX
6378For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
6379@code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
6380understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
6381can translate between the two formats.
6382
6383There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
6384Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
6385registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
6386equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
6387@samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
6388global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
6389this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
6390symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
6391
7a2de473
HPN
6392Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
6393@code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
6394The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
6395of a section.
36f63dca
NC
6396
6397Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
6398are left out from an mmo file.
6399
6400@ifclear GENERIC
6401@lowersections
6402@end ifclear
6403@end ifset
6404
6405@ifset MSP430
6406@ifclear GENERIC
6407@raisesections
6408@end ifclear
6409
6410@node MSP430
6411@section @code{ld} and MSP430
6412For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
6413will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
6414just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
6415
6416@cindex MSP430 extra sections
6417The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
6418
6419@table @code
6420@item @samp{.vectors}
6421Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
6422
6423@item @samp{.bootloader}
6424Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
6425in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6426
6427@item @samp{.infomem}
6428Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
6429this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6430
c0065db7 6431@item @samp{.infomemnobits}
36f63dca
NC
6432This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
6433in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
6434
6435@item @samp{.noinit}
6436Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
6437
c0065db7 6438The last two sections are used by gcc.
36f63dca
NC
6439@end table
6440
6441@ifclear GENERIC
6442@lowersections
6443@end ifclear
6444@end ifset
6445
2a60a7a8
AM
6446@ifset POWERPC
6447@ifclear GENERIC
6448@raisesections
6449@end ifclear
6450
6451@node PowerPC ELF32
6452@section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6453@cindex PowerPC long branches
6454@kindex --relax on PowerPC
6455Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
6456displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
6457@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
6458@samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
6459the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
6460section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
c8a1f254
NS
6461section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
6462@samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
6463both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
6464considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
2a60a7a8
AM
6465
6466@cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
6467@table @option
6468@cindex PowerPC PLT
6469@kindex --bss-plt
6470@item --bss-plt
6471Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
6472generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
6473the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
6474writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
6475@command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
6476PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
6477compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
6478BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
6479
016687f8
AM
6480@kindex --secure-plt
6481@item --secure-plt
6482@command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
6483@samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
6484when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
6485layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
6486style BSS PLT.
6487
2a60a7a8
AM
6488@cindex PowerPC GOT
6489@kindex --sdata-got
6490@item --sdata-got
6491The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
6492sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
6493@code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
6494section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
6495@code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
6496@code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
6497@samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
6498@code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
6499PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
6500pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
6501GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
6502really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
6503
6504@cindex PowerPC stub symbols
6505@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6506@item --emit-stub-syms
6507This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6508symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6509
6510@cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
6511@kindex --no-tls-optimize
6512@item --no-tls-optimize
6513PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6514sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6515disable the optimization.
6516@end table
6517
6518@ifclear GENERIC
6519@lowersections
6520@end ifclear
6521@end ifset
6522
6523@ifset POWERPC64
6524@ifclear GENERIC
6525@raisesections
6526@end ifclear
6527
6528@node PowerPC64 ELF64
6529@section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6530
6531@cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
6532@table @option
6533@cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
6534@kindex --stub-group-size
6535@item --stub-group-size
6536Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
6537by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6538@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6539sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6540a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6541the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6542conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6543prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6544A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6545branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6546@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6547@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6548detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6549positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6550
6551Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6552single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6553create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6554large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6555
6556@cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
6557@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6558@item --emit-stub-syms
6559This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6560symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6561
6562@cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
6563@kindex --dotsyms
6564@kindex --no-dotsyms
6565@item --dotsyms, --no-dotsyms
6566These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
6567in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
6568function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
6569code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
6570properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
6571to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
6572@samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
6573dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
6574feature.
6575
6576@cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
6577@kindex --no-tls-optimize
6578@item --no-tls-optimize
6579PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6580sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6581disable the optimization.
6582
6583@cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
6584@kindex --no-opd-optimize
6585@item --no-opd-optimize
6586PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
6587corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
e7fc76dd 6588the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
2a60a7a8
AM
6589Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
6590
6591@cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
6592@kindex --non-overlapping-opd
6593@item --non-overlapping-opd
6594Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
6595@code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
6596the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
6597entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
6598
6599@cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
6600@kindex --no-toc-optimize
6601@item --no-toc-optimize
6602PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
6603entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
6604reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
6605marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
6606marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
6607relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
6608unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
6609reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
6610discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
6611reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
6612code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
6613optimization.
6614
6615@cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
6616@kindex --no-multi-toc
6617@item --no-multi-toc
6618By default, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model where TOC
6619entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
6620total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
6621grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
6622TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
6623calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
6624help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
662564K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
6626Use this option to turn off this feature.
6627@end table
6628
6629@ifclear GENERIC
6630@lowersections
6631@end ifclear
6632@end ifset
6633
49fa1e15
AM
6634@ifset SPU
6635@ifclear GENERIC
6636@raisesections
6637@end ifclear
6638
6639@node SPU ELF
6640@section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6641
6642@cindex SPU ELF options
6643@table @option
6644
6645@cindex SPU plugins
6646@kindex --plugin
6647@item --plugin
6648This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
6649
6650@cindex SPU overlays
6651@kindex --no-overlays
6652@item --no-overlays
6653Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
6654regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
6655@command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
6656turns off all this special overlay handling.
6657
6658@cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
6659@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6660@item --emit-stub-syms
6661This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
6662symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6663
6664@cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
6665@kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
6666@item --extra-overlay-stubs
6667This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
6668function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
6669on calls to non-overlay regions.
6670
6671@cindex SPU local store size
6672@kindex --local-store=lo:hi
6673@item --local-store=lo:hi
6674@command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
6675the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
6676range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
6677
c0065db7 6678@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
6679@kindex --stack-analysis
6680@item --stack-analysis
6681SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
6682unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
6683under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
6684@command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
6685@command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
6686determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
6687for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
6688for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
6689for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
6690find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
6691and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
6692under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
6693dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
6694is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
6695and calls will be given.
6696
c0065db7 6697@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
6698@kindex --emit-stack-syms
6699@item --emit-stack-syms
6700This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
6701in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
6702These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
6703functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
6704functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
6705such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
6706The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
c0065db7 6707@code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
49fa1e15
AM
6708@end table
6709
6710@ifclear GENERIC
6711@lowersections
6712@end ifclear
6713@end ifset
6714
36f63dca
NC
6715@ifset TICOFF
6716@ifclear GENERIC
6717@raisesections
6718@end ifclear
6719
6720@node TI COFF
6721@section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
6722@cindex TI COFF versions
6723@kindex --format=@var{version}
6724The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
6725TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
6726also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
6727format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
6728header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
6729
6730@ifclear GENERIC
6731@lowersections
6732@end ifclear
6733@end ifset
6734
2ca22b03
NC
6735@ifset WIN32
6736@ifclear GENERIC
6737@raisesections
6738@end ifclear
6739
6740@node WIN32
6741@section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6742
c0065db7 6743This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
b45619c0 6744See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
dc8465bf 6745command line options mentioned here.
2ca22b03
NC
6746
6747@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
6748@cindex import libraries
6749@item import libraries
69da35b5 6750The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
2ca22b03 6751libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
69da35b5
NC
6752regular static archives and are handled as any other static
6753archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
2ca22b03
NC
6754support for creating such libraries provided with the
6755@samp{--out-implib} command line option.
6756
c0065db7
RM
6757@item exporting DLL symbols
6758@cindex exporting DLL symbols
dc8465bf
NC
6759The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
6760
6761@table @emph
6762@item using auto-export functionality
6763@cindex using auto-export functionality
6764By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
6765which is controlled by the following command line options:
6766
0a5d968e
NC
6767@itemize
6768@item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
6769@item --exclude-symbols
6770@item --exclude-libs
e1c37eb5 6771@item --exclude-modules-for-implib
09e2aba4 6772@item --version-script
0a5d968e
NC
6773@end itemize
6774
09e2aba4
DK
6775When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
6776(global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
6777symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
6778often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
6779private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
6780options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
6781exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
6782final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
6783
6784If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
0a5d968e
NC
6785command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
6786if either of the following are true:
6787
6788@itemize
6789@item A DEF file is used.
6790@item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
6791@end itemize
dc8465bf 6792
c0065db7
RM
6793@item using a DEF file
6794@cindex using a DEF file
dc8465bf
NC
6795Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
6796an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
6797exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
6798name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
0a5d968e 6799command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
dc8465bf
NC
6800
6801@example
6802gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
6803@end example
6804
0a5d968e
NC
6805Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
6806@samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
6807
dc8465bf
NC
6808Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
6809
6810@example
4b5bd4e7 6811LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
dc8465bf
NC
6812
6813EXPORTS
6814foo
6815bar
6816_bar = bar
4b5bd4e7
DS
6817another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
6818var1 DATA
7fcab871
KT
6819doo = foo == foo2
6820eoo DATA == var1
c0065db7 6821@end example
dc8465bf 6822
7fcab871 6823This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
4b5bd4e7
DS
6824symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
6825alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
6826by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
6827@code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7fcab871
KT
6828@code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
6829export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
6830in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
6831symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
4b5bd4e7 6832
6b31ad16
DS
6833The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
6834name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
6835the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
6836
b45619c0
NC
6837When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
6838library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6b31ad16 6839@code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
c0065db7 6840executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6b31ad16
DS
6841
6842With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
6843specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
c0065db7 6844non-default base address for the image.
6b31ad16
DS
6845
6846If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
a2877985
DS
6847or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
6848filename specified on the command line.
6b31ad16 6849
4b5bd4e7
DS
6850The complete specification of an export symbol is:
6851
6852@example
6853EXPORTS
6854 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
6855 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7fcab871 6856 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
c0065db7 6857@end example
4b5bd4e7
DS
6858
6859Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
6860@samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
6861@samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
6862@samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
6863Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7fcab871
KT
6864@samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
6865string in import/export table for the symbol.
4b5bd4e7
DS
6866
6867The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
6868
6869@code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
6870will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
6871by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
6872linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
6873library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
6874
6875@code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
6876The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
6877the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
6878@code{*_imp__foo}).
6879
6880@code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
6881well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
6882read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
6883variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
6884the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
6885extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
6886application will behave unexpectedly.
6887
6888@code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
6889it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
6890symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
6891API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
6892the DLL without an import library.
c0065db7 6893
4b5bd4e7
DS
6894See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
6895other DEF file statements
dc8465bf
NC
6896
6897@cindex creating a DEF file
6898While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
6899with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
0a5d968e
NC
6900
6901@item Using decorations
6902@cindex Using decorations
6903Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
6904itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
6905declared as:
6906
6907@example
6908__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
6909__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
6910@end example
6911
6912All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
6913any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
6914this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
6915the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
6916
6917Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
c0065db7 6918decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
0a5d968e
NC
6919instead:
6920
6921@example
6922__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
6923__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
6924@end example
6925
c0065db7
RM
6926This complicates the structure of library header files, because
6927when included by the library itself the header must declare the
0a5d968e
NC
6928variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
6929code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
c0065db7 6930of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
0a5d968e
NC
6931omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
6932@samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
b45619c0 6933information.
c0065db7 6934@end table
dc8465bf 6935
2ca22b03
NC
6936@cindex automatic data imports
6937@item automatic data imports
6938The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
69da35b5 6939by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
2ca22b03 6940compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
c0065db7 6941issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
69da35b5 6942code to these platforms, especially for large
2ca22b03 6943c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
c0065db7 6944initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
b45619c0 6945decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
c0065db7 6946platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
69da35b5
NC
6947command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
6948The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
6949suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
6950trigger the feature's use.
6951
c0065db7 6952auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
69da35b5
NC
6953additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
6954
c0065db7 6955"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
69da35b5
NC
6956documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
6957
c0065db7
RM
6958The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
6959occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
6960One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
69da35b5
NC
6961below.
6962
6963@cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
c0065db7
RM
6964For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
6965object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
6966offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
6967field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
6968in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
69da35b5 6969without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
c0065db7 6970The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
69da35b5
NC
6971references.
6972
c0065db7
RM
6973The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
6974be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
6975themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
6976runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
6977compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
6978support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
69da35b5
NC
6979run without error on an older system.
6980
c0065db7
RM
6981@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
6982enabled as needed.
2ca22b03
NC
6983
6984@cindex direct linking to a dll
6985@item direct linking to a dll
6986The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
6987including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
69da35b5 6988libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
b45619c0 6989traditional import library method, especially when linking large
c0065db7
RM
6990libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
6991function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
6992though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
69da35b5 6993storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
c0065db7 6994tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
69da35b5
NC
6995large or complex libraries when using import libs.
6996
c0065db7 6997Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
69da35b5 6998@samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
c0065db7 6999of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
69da35b5
NC
7000perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
7001select the dll instead of an import library.
7002
2ca22b03 7003
69da35b5
NC
7004For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
7005to find, in the first directory of its search path,
2ca22b03
NC
7006
7007@example
45e948fe
NC
7008libxxx.dll.a
7009xxx.dll.a
7010libxxx.a
7011xxx.lib
69da35b5 7012cygxxx.dll (*)
45e948fe
NC
7013libxxx.dll
7014xxx.dll
2ca22b03
NC
7015@end example
7016
69da35b5
NC
7017before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
7018
c0065db7
RM
7019(*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
7020where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
7021@samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
7022file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
69da35b5
NC
7023@samp{cygxxx.dll}.
7024
c0065db7
RM
7025Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
7026@samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
69da35b5
NC
7027was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
7028various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
7029could coexist on the same machine.
7030
2ca22b03
NC
7031The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
7032applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
69da35b5 7033libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
2ca22b03
NC
7034
7035@example
7036bin/
7037 cygxxx.dll
7038lib/
7039 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
c0065db7 7040 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
2ca22b03
NC
7041@end example
7042
c0065db7
RM
7043Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
7044done two ways:
2ca22b03
NC
7045
70461. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
7047@example
7048gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
c0065db7 7049@end example
2ca22b03 7050
69da35b5
NC
7051However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
7052(@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
7053@samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
7054not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
7055
2ca22b03
NC
70562. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
7057directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
7058should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
7059making the app/dll.
7060
7061@example
7062ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
c0065db7 7063@end example
2ca22b03
NC
7064
7065Then you can link without any make environment changes.
7066
7067@example
7068gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
c0065db7 7069@end example
69da35b5
NC
7070
7071This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
7072perfectly legal
7073
7074@example
7075bin/
7076 cygxxx-5.dll
7077lib/
c0065db7 7078 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
69da35b5
NC
7079@end example
7080
dc8465bf 7081Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
69da35b5
NC
7082even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
7083@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
7084
7085Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
45e948fe 7086wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
69da35b5
NC
7087
70881. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
7089work with auto-imported data.
7090
dc8465bf
NC
70912. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
7092import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
7093symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
7094for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
7095possible to do this without an import lib.
69da35b5 7096
45e948fe
NC
70973. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
7098critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
7099in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
7100stdcall-decorated assembly names.
7101
69da35b5 7102So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
c0065db7
RM
7103true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
7104a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
7105binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
69da35b5
NC
7106massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
7107requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
7108will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
dc8465bf 7109
c0065db7 7110@item symbol aliasing
dc8465bf 7111@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
7112@item adding additional names
7113Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
dc8465bf
NC
7114A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
7115exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
7116when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
c0065db7 7117import library. Consider the following DEF file:
dc8465bf 7118
c0065db7 7119@example
dc8465bf
NC
7120LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7121
7122EXPORTS
c0065db7 7123foo
dc8465bf 7124_foo = foo
c0065db7 7125@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7126
7127The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
7128
7129Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
7130source code using the "weak" attribute:
7131
c0065db7
RM
7132@example
7133void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
dc8465bf 7134void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
c0065db7 7135@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7136
7137See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
7138symbols.
7139
7140@item renaming symbols
7141Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
c0065db7 7142kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
dc8465bf
NC
7143@samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
7144DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
c0065db7 7145created). In the following example:
dc8465bf 7146
c0065db7 7147@example
dc8465bf
NC
7148LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7149
7150EXPORTS
7151_foo = foo
c0065db7 7152@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7153
7154The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
7155@samp{_foo}.
c0065db7 7156@end table
dc8465bf 7157
0a5d968e 7158Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
c0065db7 7159unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
0a5d968e 7160If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
c0065db7
RM
7161@emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
7162that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
7163@samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
7164renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
7165to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
7166the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
7167In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
0a5d968e 7168which is probably not what you wanted.
c87db184
CF
7169
7170@cindex weak externals
7171@item weak externals
7172The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
7173weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
7174defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
7175are three variants of weak externals:
7176@itemize
7177@item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
7178called lazy externals.
7179@item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
7180This form is not presently implemented.
7181@item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
7182implemented.
7183@end itemize
7184As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
7185are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
7186uses a default value.
c1711530
DK
7187
7188@cindex aligned common symbols
7189@item aligned common symbols
7190As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
7191desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
7192the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
7193carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
7194by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
7195tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
7196but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
7197warnings about unknown linker directives.
2ca22b03
NC
7198@end table
7199
7200@ifclear GENERIC
7201@lowersections
7202@end ifclear
7203@end ifset
7204
e0001a05
NC
7205@ifset XTENSA
7206@ifclear GENERIC
7207@raisesections
7208@end ifclear
7209
7210@node Xtensa
7211@section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
7212
7213@cindex Xtensa processors
7214The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
7215@code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
7216specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
7217keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
7218example, with the command:
7219
7220@smallexample
7221SECTIONS
7222@{
7223 .text : @{
7224 *(.literal .text)
7225 @}
7226@}
7227@end smallexample
7228
7229@noindent
7230@command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
7231and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
7232literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
7233interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
7234group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
7235files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
7236and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
e0001a05 7237
43cd72b9 7238@cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
e0001a05 7239@cindex relaxing on Xtensa
43cd72b9
BW
7240Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
7241provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
7242is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
7243literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
7244will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
7245location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
7246the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
7247unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
7248@code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
7249range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
7250
7251For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
7252to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
7253instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
7254instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
7255instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
7256@code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
7257hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
7258By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
7259switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
7260density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
7261instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
7262performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
7263linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
7264a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
7265
7266The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
7267control the linker:
7268
7269@cindex Xtensa options
7270@table @option
43cd72b9
BW
7271@item --size-opt
7272When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
7273more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
7274no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
7275alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
7276preserve the correctness of the code.
7277@end table
e0001a05
NC
7278
7279@ifclear GENERIC
7280@lowersections
7281@end ifclear
7282@end ifset
7283
252b5132
RH
7284@ifclear SingleFormat
7285@node BFD
7286@chapter BFD
7287
7288@cindex back end
7289@cindex object file management
7290@cindex object formats available
7291@kindex objdump -i
7292The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
7293These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
7294object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
7295format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
7296it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
7297associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
7298object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
7299(@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
7300list all the formats available for your configuration.
7301
7302@cindex BFD requirements
7303@cindex requirements for BFD
7304As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
7305several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
7306BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
7307formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
7308been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
7309BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
7310may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
7311
7312One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
7313mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
7314useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
7315conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
7316
7317@menu
7318* BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
7319@end menu
7320
7321@node BFD outline
36f63dca 7322@section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
252b5132
RH
7323@cindex opening object files
7324@include bfdsumm.texi
7325@end ifclear
7326
7327@node Reporting Bugs
7328@chapter Reporting Bugs
ff5dcc92
SC
7329@cindex bugs in @command{ld}
7330@cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
252b5132 7331
ff5dcc92 7332Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
252b5132
RH
7333
7334Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
7335it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
ff5dcc92 7336to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
252b5132 7337work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
ff5dcc92 7338@command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
7339
7340In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7341information that enables us to fix the bug.
7342
7343@menu
7344* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
7345* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
7346@end menu
7347
7348@node Bug Criteria
36f63dca 7349@section Have You Found a Bug?
252b5132
RH
7350@cindex bug criteria
7351
7352If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7353
7354@itemize @bullet
7355@cindex fatal signal
7356@cindex linker crash
7357@cindex crash of linker
7358@item
7359If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
ff5dcc92 7360@command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
252b5132
RH
7361
7362@cindex error on valid input
7363@item
ff5dcc92 7364If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
252b5132
RH
7365
7366@cindex invalid input
7367@item
ff5dcc92 7368If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
252b5132
RH
7369may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
7370object files are correct.
7371
7372@item
7373If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
ff5dcc92 7374improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
252b5132
RH
7375@end itemize
7376
7377@node Bug Reporting
36f63dca 7378@section How to Report Bugs
252b5132 7379@cindex bug reports
ff5dcc92 7380@cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
252b5132
RH
7381
7382A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
ff5dcc92 7383products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
252b5132
RH
7384recommend you contact that organization first.
7385
7386You can find contact information for many support companies and
7387individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
7388distribution.
7389
ad22bfe8 7390@ifset BUGURL
ff5dcc92 7391Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
ad22bfe8
JM
7392@value{BUGURL}.
7393@end ifset
252b5132
RH
7394
7395The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
7396@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
7397fact or leave it out, state it!
7398
7399Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
7400problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
b553b183
NC
7401assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
7402matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
7403the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
7404location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
7405were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
7406into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
7407specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
c0065db7 7408and the most helpful.
b553b183
NC
7409
7410Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
7411the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
7412on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
252b5132
RH
7413
7414Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
36f63dca
NC
7415bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
7416respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
7417You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
252b5132
RH
7418
7419To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
7420
7421@itemize @bullet
7422@item
ff5dcc92 7423The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
252b5132
RH
7424the @samp{--version} argument.
7425
7426Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
ff5dcc92 7427the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
7428
7429@item
ff5dcc92 7430Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
252b5132
RH
7431patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
7432
7433@item
7434The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
7435version number.
7436
7437@item
ff5dcc92 7438What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
252b5132
RH
7439``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
7440
7441@item
7442The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
7443observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
7444list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
7445sufficient.
7446
7447If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
7448and then we might not encounter the bug.
7449
7450@item
7451A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
b553b183
NC
7452bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
7453provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
7454bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
7455state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
7456requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
7457we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
7458attachments are best.
252b5132
RH
7459
7460If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
7461@code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
7462object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
7463@code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
7464how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
7465
7466@item
7467A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
7468incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
7469
ff5dcc92 7470Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
252b5132
RH
7471will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
7472not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
7473a chance to make a mistake.
7474
7475Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
7476say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
b45619c0 7477copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
252b5132
RH
7478C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
7479and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
7480fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
7481you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
7482any conclusion from our observations.
7483
7484@item
ff5dcc92 7485If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
252b5132
RH
7486diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
7487@samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
ff5dcc92 7488If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
252b5132
RH
7489context, not by line number.
7490
7491The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
7492sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
7493@end itemize
7494
7495Here are some things that are not necessary:
7496
7497@itemize @bullet
7498@item
7499A description of the envelope of the bug.
7500
7501Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
7502which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
7503changes will not affect it.
7504
7505This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
7506will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
7507with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
7508We recommend that you save your time for something else.
7509
7510Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
7511of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
7512output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
7513less time, and so on.
7514
7515However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
7516report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
7517
7518@item
7519A patch for the bug.
7520
7521A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
7522the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
7523a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
7524to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
7525
ff5dcc92 7526Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
252b5132
RH
7527construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
7528through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
7529able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
7530fixed.
7531
7532And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
7533patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
7534help us to understand.
7535
7536@item
7537A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
7538
7539Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
7540things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
7541@end itemize
7542
7543@node MRI
7544@appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
7545@cindex MRI compatibility
ff5dcc92
SC
7546To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
7547linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
252b5132
RH
7548alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
7549described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
7550simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
ff5dcc92 7551@command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
252b5132
RH
7552linker commands; these commands are described here.
7553
7554In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
7555file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
7556features to make use of them.
7557
7558You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
7559@samp{-c} command-line option.
7560
7561Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
7562command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
7563blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
ff5dcc92 7564MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
7565issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
7566
7567Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
7568
7569You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
7570lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
7571The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
7572
7573@table @code
7574@cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
7575@item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
7576@itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 7577Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
252b5132
RH
7578the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
7579@code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
7580your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
7581script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
7582commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
7583input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
7584@code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
7585
7586@cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
7587@item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
7588Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
7589in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
7590
7591@var{in-secname} may be an integer.
7592
7593@cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
7594@item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
7595Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
7596@var{expression} should be a power of two.
7597
7598@cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
7599@item BASE @var{expression}
7600Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
7601absolute addresses) in the output file.
7602
7603@cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
7604@item CHIP @var{expression}
7605@itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
7606This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
7607
7608@cindex @code{END} (MRI)
7609@item END
7610This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
7611
7612@cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
7613@item FORMAT @var{output-format}
7614Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
a1ab1d2a 7615language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
252b5132
RH
7616
7617@enumerate
a1ab1d2a 7618@item
252b5132
RH
7619S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
7620
7621@item
7622IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
7623
7624@item
7625COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
7626@samp{COFF}
7627@end enumerate
7628
7629@cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
7630@item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
7631Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
ff5dcc92 7632@command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
252b5132
RH
7633
7634The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
7635same line, with no change in its effect.
7636
7637@cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
7638@item LOAD @var{filename}
7639@itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
7640Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
ff5dcc92 7641same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
7642command line.
7643
7644@cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
7645@item NAME @var{output-name}
ff5dcc92 7646@var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
252b5132
RH
7647MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
7648option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
7649
7650@cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
7651@item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
7652@itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 7653Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
252b5132
RH
7654order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
7655script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
7656sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
7657file, in the order specified.
7658
7659@cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
7660@item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
7661@itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
7662@itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
7663Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
7664@var{name} used in the linker input files.
7665
7666@cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
7667@item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
7668@itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
7669@itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
7670You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
7671specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
7672If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
7673@var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
7674@end table
7675
793c5807
NC
7676@node GNU Free Documentation License
7677@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
36f63dca 7678@include fdl.texi
704c465c 7679
370b66a1
CD
7680@node LD Index
7681@unnumbered LD Index
252b5132
RH
7682
7683@printindex cp
7684
7685@tex
7686% I think something like @colophon should be in texinfo. In the
7687% meantime:
7688\long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
7689\centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
7690\centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
7691\centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
7692\centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
7693\centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
7694\centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
7695\centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
7696\page\colophon
7697% Blame: doc@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
7698@end tex
7699
252b5132 7700@bye